Bernina artista 200 Embroidery Instruction manual

s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When using an electrical appliance, basic safety
precautions should always be followed, including
the following:
Read all instructions before using this sewing
computer.
When the sewing computer is not in use, it
should be disconnected from the electricity
supply by removing the plug from the outlet.
3. Never operate this sewing computer if
• it has a damaged cord or plug
• it is not working properly
• it has been dropped or damaged
• it has fallen into water
Return the sewing computer to the nearest
authorized BERNINA dealer or service center
for examination, repair, electrical or mechanical
adjustment.
4. Never operate the sewing computer with any
air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings
of the sewing computer and foot controller
free from accumulation of lint, dust and loose
cloth.
DANGER
5. Keep fingers away from all moving parts.
Special care is required around the sewing
needle.
To reduce the risk of electric shock:
1. An appliance should never be left unattended
when plugged in.
2. Always unplug this sewing computer from
the electric outlet immediately after using and
before cleaning.
6. Always use the BERNINA original stitch
plate. The wrong plate can cause the needle
to break.
7. Do not use bent needles.
8. Do not pull or push fabric while stitching.
It may deflect the needle, causing it to break.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock
or injury to persons:
1. Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when this sewing
computer is used by or near children and
infirm persons.
2. Use this sewing computer only for its
intended use as described in this manual.
Use only attachments recommended by the
manufacturer as contained in this manual.
9. Turn power switch to «0» (off) when making
any adjustments in the needle area, such as
threading or changing the needle, threading
the bobbin or changing the presser foot etc.
10. Always unplug the sewing computer from
the electrical outlet when removing covers,
lubricating or when making any other user
servicing adjustments mentioned in this
instruction manual.
11. Never drop or insert any object into any
opening.
12. Do not use outdoors.
artista 200 – Safety Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
1
s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 2
13. Do not operate where aerosol (spray)
products are being used or where oxygen
is being administered.
14. To disconnect, turn all controls to the off («0»)
position then remove the plug from the outlet.
15. Do not unplug by pulling on the cord but
grasp the plug before pulling.
16. No responsibility will be taken for any possible
damage as the result of misuse of the sewing
computer.
17. This sewing computer is provided with double
insulation.
Use only identical replacement parts. See
instructions for Servicing of double-insulated
machines.
18. Under no circumstances should the sewing
computer be left unattended when using the
embroidery module.
SERVICING DOUBLEINSULATED PRODUCTS
In a double-insulated product, two systems of
insulation are provided instead of grounding. No
grounding means is provided on a double-insulated
product nor should a means for grounding be
added to the product. Servicing a double-insulated
product requires extreme care and knowledge of
the system and should only be done by qualified
service personnel. Replacement parts for a
double-insulated product must be identical to
those parts in the product. A double insulated
product is marked with the words «DOUBLE
INSULATION» or «DOUBLE INSULATED».
The symbol
This sewing and embroidery computer is
intended for household use only.
! SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
2
may also be marked on the product.
artista 200 – Safety Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 3
artista 200
Dear artista customer
Congratulations! With the purchase of the artista 200, you
have acquired the ultimate sewing and embroidery system
available in today’s market. By purchasing this system, you
established that you are a creative person who is looking for
the opportunity to expand the limits of creativity.
The use of modern, future-oriented technologies in the
computerized sewing and embroidery field offer you heretofore
unheard of creative growth opportunities while pursuing
your hobby. This system encompasses not only BERNINA®
hard- and software products, it also offers you a direct
connection to myartista Portal, which can keep you in constant
contact with the sewing and embroidery world.
BERNINA® wants you to fully enjoy the enormous possibilities
the artista computerized sewing system offers you. To do so,
you must know the product. Therefore, don’t hesitate to
frequent your local BERNINA® dealer and tap the knowledge of
the BERNINA® educators.
I wish you much happiness and great satisfaction while enjoying
your creative pastime.
H.P. Ueltschi
President
BERNINA Sewing Machine Manufacturers
Open to a world of imagination
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 4
Masthead
artista 200
Sewing and Embroidery Computer Instruction Manual
Text / Sewing and
Embroidery projects
Susanne Festi, Franziska Kiener, Herbert Stolz, Anna Tiberini
Photography
Ben Wiesenfarth, Konstanz: S. 8, 9, Dividers Sewing/Embroidery
Drawings
Müller-Melzer ID, Kreuzlingen
Bitmaps
Herbert Stolz, Steckborn
Design concept
Silvia Bartholdi, Schaffhausen
Inside cover (U2/U3)
Marlis Bennett, USA
Typesetting, layout,
DTP
Silvia Bartholdi, Roswitha Taubert
Print
Heer Druck AG, Sulgen
Copyright
© 2002 by Fritz Gegauf AG, Steckborn
All rights reserved.
In order to improve the product, and for our customers' benefit,
all of the sewing and embroidery computer's features, parts, and
accessories are subject to unannounced changes and alterations
at any time.
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 5
artista 200 – Sewing and Embroidery Computer Manual
Sewing
Summary of the Contents
Safety Instructions
1
Foreword
3
The Sewing Computer
7
Practical Stitches
35
Decorative Stitches
73
Lettering
97
Buttonholes 109
Quilt Stitches 135
Personal Program 149
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch
Combinations 153
Setup Program 159
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support 171
Embroidery
Connecting Peripherals 183
The Embroidery Computer 187
Important Embroidery Information 207
Embroidery 215
Saving and Deleting Motifs 239
Embroidery Support 245
Peripherals and Accessories 251
Glossary 257
Stitch Summary 261
Embroidery Design Collection 266
Index 271
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s001-6_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:07 Uhr
Seite 6
6
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Inhalt Nähen_e
19.4.2004
16:06 Uhr
Seite Z1
Sewing – Content
The Sewing Computer
7–34
Practical Stitches
35–72
Decorative Stitches
73–96
Lettering
97–108
Buttonholes
109–134
Quilt Stitches
135–148
Personal Program
149–152
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations
153–158
Setup Program
159–170
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support
171–182
Connecting Peripherals
183–186
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:08 Uhr
Seite 7
Setting up the Sewing Computer 8
Operating Instructions 11
Screen Display 23
External Functions 28
On-screen Functions 29
The Sewing Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:08 Uhr
Seite 8
Details of the Sewing Computer
13
18
20
19
21
12
22
11
23
27
24
10
25
26
28
17 16
15
7
9
29
14
30
31
32
33
6
8
34
5
3
2
4
1
35
Front view
Setting up the Sewing Computer
36
37
38
39
Back view
8
The Sewing Computer – Setting up the Sewing Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:08 Uhr
Seite 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
38
40
41
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Side view (head frame)
42
43
43
44
44
45
46
45
46
47
48
47
48
51
49
52
50
49
50
51
52
Bobbin cover
Stitch plate
Attachment base for special accessories
Darning hoop connection
Presser foot
Needle clamp
Thread guide
Needle threader
Magnifying glass holder (optional accessory)
Thread take-up cover
Thread path
Thread take-up
Bobbin pre-tension
Quick reverse button
Pattern end
Favorite function button
(programmable via Setup button)
Automatic thread cutter
Screen
Bobbin winder with on/off switch and thread
cutter
Practical stitch button
Decorative stitch button (16/4 directions)
Alphabet button
Buttonhole button
Quilt stitches button
Personal program button
Sewing mode/Embroidery mode button
Stitch width knob
Stitch length knob
Needle position buttons
Creative consultant button
Tutorial button
«clr» (clear) button
Setup button
Speaker
FHS (Free Hand System) connection
Carrying handle
Spool pin
Presser foot lifter
Slide-on table socket
Presser foot pressure dial
Thread cutter on head frame
Thread guide (while winding the bobbin
when sewing and embroidering)
Handwheel
Card slot for BERNINA Modem (optional
accessory), Personal design cards and
Embroidery cards (optional accessories)
Headset connection (optional accessory)
Connection for BERNINA CD-ROM drive USB
(optional accessory in some countries)
PC connection
Embroidery module connection
(for optional accessory)
Foot control socket
Drop feed dog
Power switch on/off («0»)
Power plug socket
Side view (handwheel)
The Sewing Computer – Setting up the Sewing Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
9
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:08 Uhr
Seite 10
Accessories
The following accessories are arranged separately
in the styrofoam packing or later in the suitcase
system (special accessory):
• foot control
• instruction manual
• power cable
• warranty card
• FHS presser foot lifter (Free Hand System)
• seam guide for slide-on table
• slide-on table
• Seasons of Artistry
• Instructional / Presentation CD-ROM
• Design / Tutorial CD-ROM
• Data Transfer CD-Rom
•
for more information for Instructional / Presentation CD-ROM see page 186 ••••••••••••••••
Soft Cover With Pocket
• protects from dust and dirt
™ when not using the sewing computer leave the
soft cover on
Accessory Box
Standard Accessories
(can vary from country to country)
A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Storing Accessories
™ set up the free standing accessory box by pulling both extensions
out until they click into place
•
•
•
Both accessory boxes are equipped with one small and one large
drawer each as well as two compartments for bobbins, two
compartments for coded presser feet and one compartment for
non-coded presser feet.
The compartments can be stored in the box (additional
compartments and drawers are available as optional extras).
™ insert the bobbins into the compartments provided
™ to remove a bobbin, press the compartment holder A lightly
™ hang presser feet in the compartments provided
™ store the remaining accessories as shown in the picture
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Suitcase System (special accessory)
The suitcase system is specially built for your sewing and embroidery
computer and has integrated wheels. This allows your system to be
transported easily and elegantly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
10
for more information see page 254 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The Sewing Computer – Setting up the Sewing Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
four bobbins
(+ one in bobbin case)
selection of 130/705 H needles
seam ripper
small screwdriver
angular Torx key
lint brush
seam guide
foam pad
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Overlock foot No. 2A
Buttonhole foot with code No. 3C
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
Zipper foot No. 4
Blind stitch foot No. 5
Jeans foot No. 8
Button sew-on foot No. 18
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Compensation plate for sewing
buttonholes
height compensating tool
vertical spool holder pin
three spool discs
oiler
CD-ROM Drive
(specific to country)
USB Cable
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 11
Setting up the Sewing Computer
Foot Control
Power Cable
B
C
A
A
C
B
Power Cable
™ plug A into sewing computer
™ plug B into electrical outlet
Foot Control Cable
™ plug C into sewing computer
(look for symbol)
Important! (USA/Canada only)
Use only foot controller type LV1
for sewing computer model
artista 200.
Power Switch
Sewing Speed
• control the sewing speed by
depressing the foot control
• raise or lower the needle by
tapping on the foot control
with your heel
Cable Tidy
™ wind the cable around the spool
™ insert the plug into A
When Sewing
™ unwind the cable to the desired
length and slip into B or C
Operating Instructions
Important! (USA/Canada only)
This sewing computer has a polarized plug (one blade wider than
the other). To reduce the risk of electric shock, this plug is intended
to fit only one way into a polarized outlet. If the plug does not fit
fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a
qualified electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the
plug in any way.
Power Switch
The power switch is on the handwheel side of the sewing computer.
1 the sewing computer is switched on («1»)
0 the sewing computer is switched off («0»)
!
Refer to the safety
instructions!
The sewing light is switched on and off with the power switch.
FHS (Free Hand System) Presser Foot Lifter
Raising and Lowering the Presser
Foot
™ the presser foot lifter raises and
lowers the presser foot
™ push to the right with your knee
™ the presser foot is raised and the
feed dog is lowered simultaneously
™ the feed dog comes up
automatically as soon as the first
stitch is sewn
Attaching the Free Hand System
™ insert the free hand system into the
opening in the base plate
™ you should be able to operate the
FHS in your normal sitting position
with your knee
Note:
Your dealer can adjust the
position of the FHS if necessary.
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
11
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 12
Slide-on Table
Larger Sewing Surface
• the slide-on table increases the sewing surface
• free arm for larger tubular items such as pant legs and
waistbands
To Attach
™ needle and presser foot fully raised
™ place over the free arm and press firmly so that it engages on
the fixing lug
To Remove
™ pull to the left
™ remove by pulling it completely from the free arm
Seam Guide
™ insert into the groove (underside of table) from the right or left
• it can be freely adjusted over the whole width of the table
Scale
number «0» on the slide-on table corresponds to the center
needle position
Screen
The artista 200 is operated with a
combination of external buttons and
knobs and a touch screen.
Welcome Screen
™ switch sewing computer on: power
switch to «1» (on)
• Welcome screen appears for a few
seconds
• can be personalized in the Setup
Program
Practical Stitch Screen
After the Welcome the Practical Stitch screen appears automatically on the screen, which shows:
A
B
F
C
D
E
J
G
L
H
M
12
N
K
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
Presser Foot Indicator
Stitch width (basic setting always visible)
Selected, active stitch and number
Single Mode
Combi Mode
Needle Position (11 possibilities)
Stitch length (basic setting always visible)
Picture of selected, active stitch and number
(Stitch Altering Area)
Up/down scroll arrows
Help symbol
Main category buttons
Functions
Stitch Selection by Number
The Sewing Computer – Setting up the Sewing Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 13
Winding the Bobbin
Winding the Bobbin
™ turn power switch to
«1» (on)
™ place empty bobbin
on spindle
Threading the Bobbin
™ place thread on spool pin
™ attach appropriate spool disc - diameter of spool
disc is disc size
™ following the direction of the arrow take thread
through the rear guide and around the
pretension stud
™ wrap the thread around the inner bobbin two
or three times and cut off any excess thread on
the thread cutter
™ press the engaging lever against the bobbin
• the bobbin winder works automatically
• the motor stops automatically when the bobbin
is full
™ remove the bobbin
Thread Cutter
™ cut the thread on the
thread cutter
Winding the Bobbin While Sewing or Embroidering
™ place thread spool on vertical spool then, following the
direction of the arrow, take thread through the thread
guide on head frame and around the pretension stud
™ wind the thread several times around the empty bobbin
™ press the engaging lever against the bobbin
• the bobbin winder works automatically
• the motor stops automatically when the bobbin is full
™ remove the bobbin
Bobbin Case
To Remove
™ raise the needle
™ turn power switch to «0» (off)
™ open the bobbin cover
™ grasp the latch of the bobbin case
with right hand
™ remove case
To Insert
™ hold the bobbin case latch
• the opening on the case should be
at the top
™ insert bobbin case so that it
engages
™ close the bobbin cover
A
Bobbin Thread Cutter
™ insert the bobbin case
™ take thread over cutter A
• cut thread
•
Caution!
Moving parts – To reduce risk of
injury, switch to «0» (off) before
servicing. Close bobbin cover.
Note:
For normal sewing, the bobbin
thread does not have to be brought
up as the loose end is just the right
length to start sewing.
to insert bobbin see page 14 •••••••••••••••••
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
13
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 14
Inserting the Bobbin
Inserting the Bobbin
™ insert the bobbin so
that the thread runs
clockwise
Pulling the Thread
Into the Slot
™ pull the thread
counter clockwise
into the slot
Pulling the Thread
Under the Spring
™ pull the thread to the
left under the spring
until it lies in the
T-shaped slit at the
end of the spring
Clockwise Turning of
the Bobbin
• the bobbin must turn
clockwise when the
thread is pulled
Threading the Upper Thread
Attaching the Thread Spool
™ raise the needle and presser foot
™ turn the power switch to «0» (off)
™ attach foam pad
™ place spool on pin (spool turns clockwise)
™ attach the appropriate spool disc - diameter of
spool is disc size
™ take thread through rear guide A
™ then into slit of upper thread tension
A
Down
™ pull thread down to the right of the take-up
cover to B
C
Up
™ take thread up to the left of the cover to C in
the direction of the arrow, placing it in the
take-up lever
Down
™ take thread down and through guides D and E
B
D
E
!
14
Refer to the safety instructions!
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 15
Needle Threader
A
B
Thread in Hook
™ lower the presser foot
™ lay the thread behind
hook B and hold
lightly
Lever Down
™ press lever A down
and simultaneously
guide the thread
around hook B to the
right to the needle
Thread in Front of
Needle
™ put the thread from
the front into the
guide until it catches
in the hook
Release the Lever and
Thread
™ let go of lever A and
thread
™ pull the thread loop
through the needle eye
Bringing up the Lower Thread
if bobbin thread is cut on the cutter (page 13), there is no need to bring
thread to the top of stitch plate
™ hold the upper thread
™ sew one stitch:
• normal sewing with presser foot down
• by tapping on foot control with your heel, with presser foot up
™ pull the upper thread to bring the lower thread up through the stitch plate hole
™ take both threads through the slit on the presser foot to the back
™ pull threads over the head frame cutter
•
Thread Cutter
Thread Cutter on Head Frame
™ pull both threads from front to back over the cutter
• the threads release as soon as the first stitch is sewn
Note:
The bobbin thread must be brought up through the stitch plate for
certain types of work. The length of thread is sufficient for most
normal work if the lower thread cutter has been used.
Changing the Needle
Removing the Needle
™ raise the needle
™ turn power switch to «0» (off)
™ lower the presser foot
™ loosen the needle clamp screw
™ pull the needle down to remove
Inserting the Needle
™ loosen the needle clamp screw, if needed
™ flat side of needle to the back
™ insert the needle as far up as it will go
™ tighten the needle clamp screw
!
Refer to the safety instructions!
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
15
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 16
Supplementary Spool Pin (vertical)
Vertical Spool Pin
• the supplementary spool pin (vertical) is stored
in the accessory box
™ insert the pin from right to left in the opening
™ to remove, pull to the right at the base of the
spool pin
• essential sewing aid when using more than one
thread, i.e. double needle, etc.
Threading the Double Needle
1. Threading the First Thread
™ place thread spool on horizontal spool pin
™ thread by guiding the thread to the front in the
slit and past the tension disc A on the right side
™ thread sewing computer as usual, but at the
thread guide B guide the thread through on the
right side and thread the right needle
A
2. Threading the Second Thread
™ place thread spool on the additional spool pin
™ thread by guiding the thread to the front in the
slit and past the tension disc A on the left side
™ guide thread on the left side of the thread guide
B and thread the left needle
• threads must not be twisted together
Note:
When using the supplementary spool pin
(vertical) always attach the foam pad (prevents the thread from getting caught on
the spool pin)
B
A
Note:
By using the Supplementary thread guide
(special accessories), thread winds off the
spool much easier.
16
Threading the Triple Needle
• two thread spools and one full bobbin are needed
™ place one thread spool on horizontal spool pin
™ place second thread spool and the lower thread
spool, separated by a spool disc, on additional
spool pin (both spools have to turn in the same
direction)
™ thread as usual by guiding two threads on the
left side of the tension disc A and the thread
guide B and one thread on the right side of disc
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 17
Stitch Plate
5.5mm Stitch Plate
(special accessory)
9mm Stitch Plate
Stitch Plate Markings
• the stitch plate is marked
with vertical lines in
millimeters and inches
• mm measurements are at the
front
• inch measurements are at the
back
• the measurements
correspond to the distance
from the needle to the line
A
A
A
•
•
•
•
Straight Stitch Plate
(special accessory)
needle insertion point is
position 0 (center needle
position)
the mm/inch measurements
are marked to the right and
left
the lines help to guide the
fabric for sewing seams and
for topstitching
the horizontal markings are
helpful for sewing corners
and buttonholes, etc.
Removing the Stitch Plate
• turn power switch off («0»)
• raise the presser foot and
needle
• press the stitch plate down at
the back right corner until it
flips up
• remove the stitch plate
Replacing the Stitch Plate
• place the stitch plate over
the opening A and press
down until it clicks into place
Note:
As in all household appliances because of the motors and electronics,
your artista 200 will get warm when in use. This is a normal occurence.
Important Facts About Thread and Needles
With the right combination of thread and needle
optimum sewing results are achieved.
Thread
The thread is chosen according to use. For a perfect sewing result, thread and material quality play
an important role.
Cotton Thread
• cotton thread has the advantage of a natural
fiber and therefore is especially suitable for
sewing cotton fabrics
• if cotton thread is mercerized it will have a slight
sheen
Needle, Thread and Fabric
Care has to be taken when combining needle and
thread.
The correct needle size does not only depend on
the chosen thread, but also has to be well-suited
to the fabric used. The fabric weight determines
the thread weight and needle size.
The following are the guidelines:
•
Polyester Thread
• polyester thread is suitable for practically all
sewing needs
• it has a high tensile strength and is particularly
colorfast
• polyester thread is more flexible and is recommended where a strong and elastic seam is
required
•
•
Needle No.
fine fabrics:
fine thread (darning thread,
embroidery thread)
70–75
mediumweight fabrics:
normal thread
80–90
heavyweight fabrics:
stronger thread
100, 110, 120
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
17
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 18
Needle/Thread Combination
In order to check the needle/thread compatibility, the correct size thread must correspond with the correct
size needle.
Correct Needle/Thread
Combination
When sewing, the thread should
travel smoothly down the long
groove on the front of the
needle. The thread can be
secured optimally.
Too Thin Thread or Too Thick
Needle
The thread does not travel
smoothly in the groove. Faulty
stitches and damage of the
thread can occur.
Needle Summary
130/705 H S 70
Too Thick Thread or Too Fine
Needle
The thread rubs on the edges of
the groove and can get jammed.
This can break the thread.
Shank diameter
= 0.7 mm (needle
size)
BERNINA uses needle system
130/705 H. This system number
refers to shank shape as well as
to length and form of the needle
point.
Needle point
e.g. medium ball point
Needle scarf
Flat shank
Shank length
Checking the Needle Condition
The needle condition should be checked and the needle
replaced regularly. A defective needle not only damages the
sewing but also the sewing computer.
The following are the guidelines: replace needle when starting a
new sewing project or as required.
•
18
more about this subject see «Trouble Shooting» on page 180 ••••••••••••
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 19
Many materials are easier to sew if the appropriate needle is used.
Model
Suitable for
Needle size
60–100
Normal point, slightly rounded
For nearly all natural and
synthetic fabrics (woven and
knitted)
Jersey, stretch fabrics
70–90
Natural and synthetic leather and
plastic
90–100
Heavyweight fabrics such as
denim, canvas, overalls
80–100
Micro fiber fabrics and silk
60–90
Straight and topstitching
75–90
Embroidery on all natural and
synthetic fabrics
75–90
Sewing with metallic threads
75-90
Topstitching with thick thread
80–100
Hemstitching
100–120
Double wing
needle
130/705 H-ZWI-HO
Special effects with hemstitch
embroidery
100
Double needle
130/705 H-ZWI
Visible hems in stretch fabrics,
pintucks, decorative sewing
70–100
Decorative sewing
80
Type of needle
Universal
130/705 H
Jersey/Stretch
130/705 H-S
130/705 H-SES
130/705 H-SUK
Leather
130/705 H-LL
130/705 H-LR
Ball point
Cutting point
Jeans
130/705 H-J
Very fine point
Microtex
130/705 H-M
Especially fine point
Quilting
130/705 H-Q
Fine point
Embroidery
130/705 H-E
Large eye, slight ball point
Metafil
130/705 H-MET
Large eye
Cordonnet
130/705 H-N
Small ball point, long eye
Wing needle
130/705 HO
Wide needle (wing)
Needle distance: 1.0 / 1.6 / 2.0 /
2.5 / 3.0 / 4.0 / 6.0 / 8.0
Triple needle
130/705 H-DRI
Needle distance 3.0
Special needles are available at your BERNINA dealer.
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
19
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 20
Presser Feet
Note: The letter «C» after a foot number indicates the foot is coded or equipped with a sensor for
9mm stitching. When a stitch is selected with a coded foot attached to the sewing computer, the
preprogrammed width is 9mm, rather than 5.5mm. This letter does not always appear on the foot and in
some cases does not appear on the screen in the presser foot indicator.
1C
Reverse pattern
foot
Practical and
decorative
stitches
2A
Overlock foot
Overlock seams,
oversewing
seam edges
3C
Buttonhole foot
with code
Buttonholes
(shows as foot
No. 3C on-screen)
4
3A
Zipper foot
Automatic buttonhole
Sewing in zippers
foot
Buttonholes in flat materials
Darning program (shows
as foot No. 3A on-screen)
5
Blind stitch
foot
Blind hems
Edge stitching
8
Jeans foot
Straight
stitching in thick,
firm fabrics
18
Button
sew-on foot
Sewing on
buttons, hooks
and eyes
20C
Open embroidery foot
Embroidery, appliqué,
satin stitch seams,
monograms
40C
Sideways
motion foot
For all sideways
motion
stitches
BERNINA Specialty Presser Feet
The standard selection of presser feet covers most normal sewing requirements, but we recommend the
use of BERNINA specialty presser feet for specific sewing tasks such as quilting, heirloom sewing, home
decorating, tailoring, etc.
They are available from your BERNINA dealer.
Samples of Specialty Presser Feet
50
Walking foot
For fabrics which stick
or tend to slip and for
quilting
20
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
9
Darning foot
Used with the feed dog
in a lowered position for
darning, monograms, and
freehand embroidery
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 21
Changing the Presser Foot
!
Refer to the safety
instructions!
Changing the Presser
Foot
™ raise the needle and
presser foot
™ turn power switch
to «0» (off)
Raising the Lever
™ raise the clamping
lever
™ remove the presser
foot
Attaching the Presser
Foot
™ guide the foot
upwards over the
cone
™ press the clamping
lever down
Presser Foot Pressure
Dial on Head Frame
The presser foot pressure
can be set on the left of
the head frame.
Standard Pressure
• for all normal sewing
Reduced Pressure
• for jerseys and loose
knits, quilting
• prevents fabric from
stretching
™ adjust pressure so
that the fabric still
feeds correctly
Increased Pressure
• for firm fabrics;
improves fabric feed
Feed Dog
Button on Handwheel Side of Sewing Computer
Button flush with base plate = feed dog up, sewing
position
• for all machine-fed sewing
Button depressed = feed dog lowered, darning position
• for freehand sewing (darning, freehand embroidery,
freehand quilting)
• for embroidery (with the embroidery module)
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
21
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 22
Feed Dog and Fabric Feed
Feed Dog and Stitch Length
With each stitch the feed dog moves forward by
one step. The length of this step is determined by
the stitch length selected. With an extremely short
stitch length, the steps are short. The fabric moves
under the foot quite slowly, even at full sewing
speed, buttonholes or satin stitch.
Important
• let the fabric feed
evenly!
• pulling or pushing
will result in gaps and
can lead to needle
breakage
• holding back will
result in thread
build-up
Height Compensating Tool
1
The feed dog can work
normally when the foot
is level.
If the foot is at an
angle, e.g. when
sewing over thick to
thin or vice versa, the
feed dog cannot grip
and feed the fabric.
To solve this problem,
place one, two or three
compensating plates as
required behind the
needle under the
presser foot.
To correct the height in
front of the foot, place
one or more plates to
the right of the foot
next to the needle. Sew
until the foot is level
again and remove the
plates.
When sewing corners,
only a small section of
the fabric is actually on
the feed dog so that it
cannot grip the fabric
well.
Correct this by placing one
or more compensating
plates as close as possible
to the edge of the fabric.
Feed Dog and Sewing Corners
The gap between the
two rows of teeth is
relatively large due to
the width of the stitch
plate hole.
22
The Sewing Computer – Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 23
Stitch Selection – Stitches – Functions
Stitch Selection
™ touch the stitch of your choice
• the stitch is highlighted in blue
• every stitch in the Stitch Altering Area (SAA) is displayed
with its number
Screen Display
Altering the Stitch Width
™ turn the upper knob
Altering the Stitch Length
™ turn the lower knob
The altered stitch width is shown in
two different ways:
The altered stitch length is shown in
two different ways:
• stitch length bar 0-5 is displayed
as yellow area
• altered length is visible on stitch
length bar (highlighted in blue), in
addition the actual setting is
shown (blue number)
• the basic setting is always visible
when a change has been made,
e.g. 1.5mm (black bar)
• stitch length can be altered from
0mm to 5mm on most stitches
•
•
•
•
•
stitch width bar 0-9 (0-5.5) is
displayed as yellow area
altered width is visible on stitch
width bar (highlighted in blue), in
addition the actual setting is
shown (blue number)
the basic setting is always visible
when a change has been made,
e.g. 3.5mm (black bar)
stitch width can be altered from
0mm to 9mm when using coded
feet
stitch width can be altered from 0
to 5.5mm max. when using
non-coded feet, the stitch width
bar automatically shows 0-5.5mm
Display of Selected Stitch
• a graphic of the selected stitch is
visible in the left portion of the
screen
• changes to stitches can be seen on
screen
The Sewing Computer – Screen Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
23
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 24
Restoring the Basic Settings
™ touch the external button «clr» (clear)
• the basic setting of the selected stitch
will be restored
™ clear by pressing small number on
stitch width and stitch length bar
Altering the Needle Position
™ press the right or left Needle Position button
• each press moves the needle one position to the
right or left
™ keep button pressed to quickly change needle
positions
• the middle position of the bar is marked in black
• the basic setting (bordered in gray) is always
visible
Presser Foot Indicator
• the recommended presser foot for
the selected stitch is displayed by
number
• by touching the Presser Foot symbol,
further possible presser feet for the
selected stitch will be displayed
• if the presser foot is raised it is
indicated with an arrow
Selecting Functions
™ touch the function of your choice
• the selected function is highlighted in blue
(a number of different functions can be selected
simultaneously)
•
for more information on Functions see pages
29-33 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
for more information see page 39 •••••••••••••
Temporary Altered Stitch Memory
Stitch length, stitch width, needle position, etc. are
automatically saved. When the sewing computer is
turned off («0») or the «clr» (clear) button is
pressed, the changes are deleted.
Saving Altered Settings Permanently
The basic settings programmed by BERNINA can be
changed and stored in the SAA. They will stay
saved even after the sewing computer is turned off
(«0»). The basic settings are always visible.
Changing Settings (stitch width, stitch length,
needle position, thread tension, etc.)
™ select stitch for which you want to alter width,
length and/or needle position (e.g. zig-zag)
24
The Sewing Computer – Screen Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 25
Changing Basic Settings
™ alter the stitch width and length settings using the
external knobs
™ alter the needle position with the external buttons
™ touch Stitch Altering Area (light blue)
• a special screen opens
™ touch «Save Settings» = all changes are saved
™ touch «Reset Settings» to return to basic settings
™ touch «ESC» and the screen closes without
anything being saved or altered
•
for more information on the lower
two bars see Personal Program on
page 152 •••••••••••••••••
Stitch Selection
Stitches can be selected using one of
the two methods listed below.
Note:
If an unavailable number is entered, the following
message will appear: This number is not available in the
sewing computer.
Direct Selection by Scrolling up/down Within a Stitch
Category
™ touch the arrow (down)
• scroll the screen to view all stitches in selected category
• the top row disappears
• the next two rows move up
• a new row appears at the bottom
™ touch the arrow (up)
• the first row of stitches appears again
• the Scroll function (up/down) is used to find and view all the
sewing computer’s stitches
• use when a visual search for a particular stitch is needed
• when the desired stitch is located, touch to select
Selecting a Stitch by Number
™ touch the function «0–9»
• the screen changes to a numeric pad
™ touch numbers to select the stitch of your choice
• the number of the selected stitch appears in the upper screen
Correcting Mistakes
™ to correct mistakes or deselect, touch function top right
(arrow)
• the number is deleted from right to left
™ touch the field above the numeric pad
• the entire number is deleted
™ enter new number
Confirm and Go to Next Screen
™ touch «OK» to confirm
• the screen displays the selected stitch
• the selected stitch is active (highlighted in blue)
Back to Previous Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the previous screen appears
• if the selection was not confirmed by touching «OK», the
stitch selected by number will be ignored
The Sewing Computer – Screen Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
25
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 26
Simple Menu Selection
Main Category Buttons
™ press a button to select the desired menu
• the first stitch, stitch program or stitch summary
appear on the screen
Practical Stitches
Practical Stitch Button
•
•
•
the Practical Stitch menu appears
15 practical stitches appear on the screen
use arrows to scroll for viewing additional stitches
Decorative Stitches 16/4 Directions
Decorative Stitch Button, 16/4 Directions
the Decorative Stitch menu appears
6 categories appear on screen
• use arrows to scroll for viewing additional groups
• different stitch types and sizes can be selected
• sideways motion stitches are indicated with 4 arrows
™ touch to select the desired stitch group
• the selected stitch group appears
•
•
Alphabets
Alphabet Button
• the Alphabet menu appears on the screen
™ touch to select the alphabet of your choice
Buttonholes
Buttonhole Button
•
26
the Buttonhole menu appears on the screen, including the
eyelet and button sew-on programs
The Sewing Computer – Screen Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 27
Quilting
Quilt Stitch Button
• the Quilt Stitch screen appears
™ touch to select
• 15 quilt stitches are visible on screen
• use arrows to scroll for additional stitches
Personal Program
Personal Program Button
•
Personal screen appears (customized settings)
Embroidery Mode / Sewing Mode
Embroidery Mode / Sewing Mode Button
™ change between Embroidery and Sewing Mode
and vice versa
Setup Program
Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• options appear
• use Setup to customize your sewing computer’s settings
• customized settings can be reprogrammed
at any time or reset to BERNINA factory settings
The Sewing Computer – Screen Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
27
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 28
External Function Buttons
Altering Needle Position
™ press the left or right Needle Position
button
• the needle moves to the right or left
as selected
™ keep button pressed to quickly
change needle positions
• total of 11 needle positions:
5 left, 5 right, and 1 center
Tutorial
™ press the Tutorial button
• brief operating instructions, advice
on fabric, needle or techniques, etc.
appear
External Functions
Creative Consultant
™ press the Creative Consultant button
• advice on fabric, needle or
techniques, etc.
•
for more information on Creative Consultant
see pages 175-176 •••••••••••••••••••••••••
«clr» (Clear) Button
™ press the «clr» button
• stitch length, width and needle
position are returned to basic
settings
• all active functions will be deleted
Exception:
Safety functions (needle stop position,
Security Program and motor speed)
Favorite Function Button
• this button can be individually
programmed in Setup with
functions displayed
• the programmed function is shown
with an «F» in the display
• selected function can be cancelled
and reprogrammed at any time with
another function
•
28
for more information on the Favorite Function
Button see page 166 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Setup Button
™ press Setup
• options with alteration
possibilities appear
™ touch one of the buttons
• the desired alterations can be
made
• alterations remain even after the
sewing computer is turned off
(«0»)
• customized settings can be cancelled or reprogrammed at any
time
Automatic Thread Cutter
™ press external button
• upper and bobbin thread are cut
automatically
Quick Reverse Button on Head
Frame
™ press the Quick Reverse button
on head frame
• secure the seam beginning and
end: sews in reverse as long as
button is depressed
• used to program buttonhole
length
• used to program darning length
• used to designate end of
stitching in straight stitch
Securing stitch No. 5
• used to start/stop stitching with
the embroidery module (special
accessory)
Pattern End (on head frame)
™ press the Pattern End button
• sewing computer stops at the
end of the active single pattern
or the active pattern of a
combination
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 29
General Functions
The following functions are found on various
screens and programs of the artista 200 sewing
computer. They are consistently used in the same
manner for specific tasks when accessing and
moving between different programs.
On-screen Functions
Single Mode
• the Single Mode is always active
(blue) when turning on the sewing
computer and only the selected
stitch can be sewn
Combi Mode
™ touch symbol
• the Combi Mode is active (blue)
and stitch combinations can be
programmed
Scroll Up
™ touch symbol one or more times
• stitches within a stitch category
scroll up to show more options
• touch the symbol continuously to
scroll quickly
Scroll Down
™ touch symbol one or more times
• stitches within a stitch category
scroll down to show more options
• touch the symbol continuously to
scroll quickly
«?» (Help)
™ touch Help
™ touch a stitch or a function
• a description of the selected stitch
or function appears
™ close with «ESC»
Note:
If you press the question mark the
machine is «locked». If you touch
the screen (anywhere) the
machine will sew again.
Closing Special Applications
™ touch «ESC»
• the special application closes
• returns to previous screen
OK
™ touch symbol
• adjustment/selection is activated or
confirmed, e.g. stitch selection by
number
• programmed adjustment/selection
is ready to sew
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
29
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 30
Special Functions
The following functions are found on the artista 200
sewing computer. Each function which can be used
in the selected program is either shown in the yellow
part of the screen or on the two bottom rows of the
gray part of the screen.
Presser Foot Indicator
• the recommended presser foot for the
selected stitch is displayed by number
™ touch symbol
• a screen will appear with further
presser foot options
• if the presser foot is raised it is indicated
with an arrow
Indication of the Altered Stitch Width
or Stitch Length
• return to basic setting by touching the
stitch width/stitch length bar
Long Stitch
™ touch symbol
• sewing computer sews every second
stitch (max. stitch length 10mm)
• can be activated for all practical,
decorative, and directional stitches
except buttonholes and sideways
motion stitches
• functions and stitches can be combined
• can be programmed in Combi Mode
and saved in File Drawers
Applications:
combine with straight stitch to baste
• combine with triple straight stitch for
topstitching
•
Pattern Extend 2–5 x
™ touch one or more times
• the numbers 2–5 appear depending on
the type of stitch selected
• the length of selected stitch will be
increased by 2–5 times
• stitch integrity is maintained
• lengthened stitches can be programmed
in Combi Mode
™ touch the symbol longer and the function is turned off. The symbol is inactive
(yellow)
Note:
The 0-9 function button (Stitch Selection
by Number) as well as the History function
button (the 15 last selected stitches) are
always visible on the screen.
Pattern Begin
• the symbol is automatically highlighted in
blue (= active), when a stitch is selected
• after beginning to sew the symbol is
turned off (inactive, yellow)
™ touch symbol
• the needle moves to the beginning of a
stitch or stitch program
Applications:
• decorative stitches, buttonholes, working
in Combi Mode
Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)
™ touch symbol
• sewing computer sews selected stitch in
Vertical Mirror Image (left/right – determined by the sewing direction)
• can be programmed in Combi Mode and
saved in File Drawers
Applications:
• blindstitch for shell edging
• decorative stitching
• stitch combinations
Vertical Mirror Image (up/down)
™ touch symbol
• sewing computer sews selected stitch in
Horizontal Mirror Image (up/down –
determined by the sewing direction)
• can be programmed in Combi Mode and
saved in File Drawers
Applications:
• decorative stitching
• stitch combinations
Applications:
• lengthen existing stitches without
affecting the stitch density
• combine stitches
30
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 31
Stitch Counter
™ touch symbol
™ when the desired length is reached (e.g.
first buttonhole bead or straight stitch),
press the external Quick Reverse button
• the display (or indicator) changes to
«auto» (for the buttonhole, only after
length of second bead is determined by
pressing the Quick Reverse button)
• the selected stitch is programmed
(temporarily)
Save
™ touch symbol
• saves stitch combinations and letters
Delete
™ touch symbol
• deletes individual stitches or letters
above the cursor
• deletes stitch combinations
• deletes “Drawers” content
Combination Sub-divider (1)
™ touch symbol
• each combination can be sub-divided
into several parts
• each combination part is totally
independent of one another
Combination Sub-divider (2)
™ touch symbol
• each combination can be sub-divided as
desired
• after stop press the foot control and the
next part is sewn
Alphabet Size
• when an alphabet is selected the size is
9mm (field with 1 is blue)
™ touch symbol
• size will be reduced to 6mm (field with
2 is blue)
Monogram Size
• when a monogram is selected the size is
30mm (field with 1 is blue)
™ touch symbol once or twice
• the blue field shows the selected size:
1 = 30mm (standard)
2 = 20mm
3 = 15mm
Multifunction Button
(only available in Combi Mode)
™ touch symbol
• a special screen with further functions
opens:
• Delete Combination
• Save Combination
• Mirror Combination
• Preview
Direct Entry Length (in mm) or
On-screen Button Measurement
™ touch symbol
• buttonhole length (number in mm) can be
entered directly by the stitch width knob
™ for measuring the button, hold button to
bottom lower left corner of screen and
enter button length = adjust blue circle to
button size using stitch width knob
• 2mm for the button thickness will be
added automatically (with button
measurement only)
Programming Buttonhole Length
• symbol is automatically highlighted in
blue (= active) when a buttonhole is
selected
• using the Quick Reverse button on head
frame a buttonhole length can be
determined directly
• when the buttonhole is programmed the
symbol is turned off (inactive, yellow)
• if a new length is to be programmed the
symbol has to be re-selected
Manual 4 or 6 Step Buttonholes
™ touch symbol
• a special screen appears
™ sew manual buttonhole in 4 or 6 steps
(according to buttonhole type)
Needle Stop Adjustment
™ touch the needle stop symbol
• arrow points down on screen (field is
highlighted in blue)
• the sewing computer always stops with
the needle down
™ touch symbol again = needle stop reverts
to up
Upper Case / Lower Case
• Upper Case is activated when Alphabet is
selected
™ touch symbol
• Lower Case is activated
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
31
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 32
Securing Function (with 4 stitches)
™ touch symbol before starting to sew =
individual stitches or stitch combination
will be secured at the beginning
™ touch symbol during sewing individual
stitches = individual stitches will be secured at the end, the sewing computer
continues sewing
™ touch symbol at the end of an individual
stitch or stitch combination = the stitch
or stitch combination will be secured
™ programming the function within a
stitch combination = each individual
stitch of the stitch combination can be
secured at the beginning or at the end
Applications:
• sewing individual decorative stitches
• sewing individual letters
• sewing stitch combinations and words
Thread Tension
™ touch symbol
• the Thread Tension screen appears
• the Thread Tension can be altered
• the selected setting is visible in the field
Pattern Repeat 1–9 x
• by touching the symbol several times
the numbers 1-9 appear
• 1 = sewing computer stops at the end
of an individual stitch or stitch
combination
• 2–9 = sewing computer stops at the end
of a stitch or stitch combination after
the number of repeats selected
™ touch the symbol longer and the function is turned off. The symbol is inactive
(gray)
Applications:
• sewing individual motifs
• combine with practical and decorative
stitches
• in combination with 4-directional sewing
Balance
™ touch symbol
• Balance screen appears
™ balance forwards and reverse stitches
™ balance sideways motion stitches
Applications:
• adapting practical and decorative
stitches to various types of fabrics
(e.g. Honeycomb stitch)
• altering decorative stitches for a new
look
• balancing buttonholes to different
fabrics
• balancing sideways motion stitches
to different fabrics
32
Motor Speed
1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 4/4
™ touch symbol one or more times to
select the desired speed
• selected speed is displayed
• reduces or increases the speed with the
foot control fully depressed
™ touch the symbol longer and the default
speed (4/4) is set again
Applications:
• adjust speed for decorative sewing
computer work such as freehand
embroidery or freehand quilting and
when more control is desired for the
sewing task
• reduce speed when children are sewing
Security Program
™ touch symbol
• a special screen appears
• by selecting the respective needle
symbol the stitch width will be limited
automatically
• this prevents the inserted special needle
(double needle, etc.) from hitting the
presser foot or the stitch plate =
avoiding needle breakage
• the numbers represent the distance in
mm between the needles of the double
and triple needle
• by selecting the respective stitch plate
icon the stitch width is limited
automatically so that the inserted
standard needle cannot hit the stitch
plate
• once a feature is active the symbol turns
red
• selected functions remain active even
after sewing computer is turned
off («0»)/on
™ touch «OK» to activate selected Security
Program function
• Security Program functions must be
removed within Security Program by
selecting desired needle and stitch plate
Applications:
• to stitch pintucks and for hemstitching
• hemming knits
• decorative stitches
• sewing special fabrics
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 33
Continuous Reverse Sewing
™ touch symbol
• sews the selected stitch in reverse
Applications:
• darning with straight or running stitch
• decorative stitching on sleeves or
trouser legs
• quilting
History
™ touch symbol
• the last maximum 15 sewn stitches
appear on a separate screen
• a stitch already contained in the History
screen will be overwritten when sewing
restarts
• same stitches with different settings
have to be saved in the Personal
Program
™ select desired stitch = stitch appears in
Stitch Altering Area
• sewn stitches remain in History even
after sewing computer is turned
off («0»)/on
myartista Portal
™ connect the Modem
™ touch symbol
™ confirm first message with «Yes» and
second message with «OK»
• the connection to the myartista Portal
site is made
Stitch Selection by Number
™ touch symbol
• special screen appears
• select individual stitch by touching the
appropriate number combination
™ touch «OK» to confirm selection and
bring stitch into SAA
Applications:
• easy selection of individual stitch
• easy selection for stitch combination in
Combi Mode
File Drawers
™ touch symbol
• the Drawers screen appears
Bobbin Thread Length
• when the Bobbin Thread Length runs
low the sewing computer stops and the
following message appears: «Please
check lower thread»
• as long as the message is visible, the
lower thread control is turned off and
sewing can continue
• if the message is closed with «OK» the
lower thread control is active again
Lowered Feed Dog
if the feed dog is lowered this symbol
appears underneath the Presser Foot
Indicator
•
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
33
s007-34_e.qxd
19.4.2004
16:09 Uhr
Seite 34
Thread Tension
Basic tension settings apply automatically when a stitch or program is selected.
The tension is factory set for best possible sewing results using a 100 weight, 2 ply polyester thread
(100/2).
The tension may vary when using other types of thread such as embroidery thread, and it may be necessary to adjust tension to suit the fabric and stitch type.
Thread Tension
™ touch symbol
Altering the Tension
• the perfect stitch formation is shown on the left side of the screen
(stitch formation in the fabric)
• the basic value is indicated by the bar on the scale (in blue)
™turn stitch width or stitch length knob to the left or right = the thread
tension is loosened or tightened
• the tension alteration is indicated on the left side of the tension scale
• tighter upper thread tension (= the upper thread is tightened which pulls
the lower thread more to the right side of the fabric)
• loosen upper thread tension (= the upper thread is loosened which pulls
the upper thread more to the wrong side of the fabric)
• the tension alteration affects only the selected stitch and will be deleted
with «clr» and does not remain saved when turning the sewing computer
off («0»)
• the alteration is indicated on the scale and on the function button on
screen
• the basic value stays visible (in black) when a change is made
Save and Close
™ touch «OK»
• the alteration is saved, the screen display changes
Back to Basic Settings
™ touch «Reset» to return tensions to the basic setting
™ touch «OK» to confirm
No Adjustments
™ touch «ESC»
• the existing thread tension is not changed
34
The Sewing Computer – On-screen Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 35
Summary Practical Stitches 36
In General 38
Temporary Altered Stitch
Memory 39
Long Stitch Function 40
Straight Stitches 41
• Straight stitch No. 1 • Securing stitch No.5
• Edgestitching • Zippers • Triple straight stitch
• Basting stitch
Zig-zag Stitch 50
• Zig-zag No. 2 • Zig-zag seam • Triple Zig-zag
Blind Hem 52
Sewing Knit Fabrics 53
• Notes and tips for sewing knit fabrics
• Honeycomb stitch No. 8 • Vari-overlock No. 3
• Double overlock No. 10
• Super stretch No. 11 • Stretch overlock No.13
• Visible hem stitch with Jersey stitch No. 14
• Ribbing with Vari-overlock No. 3
• Hem with double needle • Ribbing
Reinforcing Edges 62
Sewing on Elastic, Shirring
Elastic/Cord 63
Darning, Repairing 67
• Automatic darning • Manual darning
• Patching knits and jersey
Freehand Embroidery 70
Bartack Programs 71
• Bartack • Fly stitch
Practical Stitches
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 36
Summary Stitches
Summary
Application of Practical Stitches
Straight stitch
All non-stretch fabrics. All straight
stitch work
Triple straight stitch
Reinforced seams in firm, heavy
fabrics, topstitching and visible seams
Zig-zag
Most fabric types. All simple zig-zag
applications such as oversewing fine
fabrics, attaching elastic, lace and
appliqué
Triple zig-zag
Reinforced seams in firm fabrics, visible hems and seams, decorative stitching, couching
Vari-overlock
Primarily for fine jerseys, stretch overlock
seams, hems and stretch seams
Running stitch
Most types of fabric. Mending, patching,
reinforcing seams
Securing stitch (straight stitch)
All types of fabric. Secures the beginning
and end of seams sewn with straight
stitch
36
Practical Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Honeycomb stitch
Most types of interlock and smooth
fabrics, visible seams, hems, linens
and some types of mending
Blindstitch
Most types of fabric. Blind hems, shell
edging on soft jerseys and fine
fabrics, decorative seams
Double overlock
All types of knit. Sews and finishes
the edges in one operation
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 37
Super stretch
Open seam in all super-stretch fabrics,
such as Lycra
Gathering stitch
Most types of fabric. Gathering with
shirring elastic. Butted seams (edge to
edge) and decorative stitching
Stretch overlock
Mediumweight knits, toweling and firm
wovens. Overlock seams, flat joining
seams
Jersey stitch
Natural, blended or synthetic fabrics and
delicate knits. Visible seams and hems.
Mending jersey/interlock
Knit overlock
All knits, machine or handmade,
overlock seam. Sews and finishes
edges in one operation
Basting
Basting seams, hems, etc.
Simple darning program
Automatic darning in fine and
mediumweight fabrics
Reinforced darning program
Automatic darning in heavyweight
fabrics
Bartack program
Reinforcing pocket edges, belt loops,
etc.
Universal stitch
Firm fabrics such as felt and leather. Flat
joining seams, visible seams, attaching
elastic, decorative seams
Sewn-out zig-zag
Oversewing woven fabrics, reinforcing
edges, attaching elastic, decorative
seaming
Lycra stitch
All two-way stretch fabrics, flat joining
seams and hems, reinforced seaming on
underwear
Stretch stitch
All stretch fabrics, open seam in
sportswear
Bartack program
Reinforcing pocket edges, belt loops,
securing zippers
Fly stitch large
Medium- to heavyweight fabrics,
reinforcing pocket edges, zippers and
openings
Fly stitch small
Fine to mediumweight fabrics,
reinforcing pocket edges, zippers and
openings
Blindstitch narrow
Blind hems on fine fabrics
Reinforced overlock
Medium-to heavyweight knits and
toweling, overlock seams, flat joining
seams
Practical Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
37
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 38
In General
Adjusting Individual Practical Stitches
Depending on the fabric and application an alteration of the basic
settings may be necessary.
Altering Stitch Width and
Stitch Length
™ depending on the fabric it may
be necessary that the stitch
width or the stitch length is
altered
™ can be altered while sewing
™ use stitch width or stitch
length knob to make
alteration
Changing the Needle Position
™ press external Needle Position
buttons to change the needle
position, so stitching can be
placed exactly where it is
required
• there are a total of 11 needle
positions (5 left, 5 right, and
1 center)
™ keep button pressed to change
needle positions quickly
Securing With Quick Reverse
Button (on Head Frame)
• secures the seam beginning
and end
™ press the Quick Reverse button
and the sewing computer
sews in reverse
™ release the Quick Reverse
button and the sewing
computer sews forwards
Closed Seams (Overlock
Seams)
Seams which cannot be pressed
open
• sewn and finished in one
operation
• narrow seam allowances
Suggested stitches:
• vari-overlock, double overlock
and jersey
Application:
• primarily for knits and jerseys
• excellent for knit clothing,
lingerie, and bed linens
Flat Joining Seams
Seams where the edges are
overlapped and then sewn
• stitching is on the seam
allowances
Suggested stitch:
• stretch-overlock
Application:
• particularly good for toweling
and Lycra
• also good for beachwear,
leisure wear, and lingerie
Practical Stitch Seams
Open Seams
Seams which are pressed open
• seam allowance width as wide
as required
• seam lies flat
• seam does not stretch
Suggested stitches:
• straight, narrow zig-zag, super
stretch, and triple zig-zag
Application:
• primarily for woven fabrics
• works for most types of
sewing projects, including
clothing, home accessories,
and crafts
38
Practical Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 39
Temporary Altered Stitch Memory
Stitch:
any selected stitch
Temporary Altered Stitch Memory
• stitch length, stitch width, needle position, etc.
are automatically saved
• by altering the stitch width and stitch length,
all stitches can suit both the fabric and sewing
•
the Temporary Altered Stitch Memory is
particularly useful when alternating between two
applications, such as overcasting and seaming edges
or straight stitch and zig-zag as in heirloom sewing
• the stitches can be changed as needed
• when changing back to the altered stitch, the
previous individually altered setting will stay saved
Note:
The altered stitch memory can hold as many
stitch alterations as needed (these are stitch
length, stitch width, Needle Position, Mirror
Images, Pattern Extend, Long Stitch function,
Thread Tension, Balance and Pattern Repeat
function 1-9x).
Example:
™ select Zig-zag stitch No. 2 and alter stitch
width to 9mm (e.g. overcasting an edge)
™ select straight stitch and sew seam
™ overcasting another edge: select the
Zig-zag stitch No. 2 again
• the altered setting of the stitch width to
9mm stays saved
Return to Basic Settings – Delete Altered Stitch
Memory
• Method 1: press the external «clr» button (active
stitch in basic setting)
• Method 2: revert to the stitch width and length by
touching the stitch width/stitch length bar
(or manually by turning the external knob) revert to
other functions manually
• Method 3: turn sewing computer off («0») – altered
settings will not be saved
TIP
Save the altered basic settings
Save the stitch with altered basic
settings in the Personal Program or
to save the settings permanently.
•
for more information on «Personal Program» see
pages 149-152 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
for more information to save the settings permanently
see page 24 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Practical Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
39
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 40
Long Stitch Function
Long Stitch Function
• the sewing computer sews every second stitch
(the longest stitch possible is 10mm when the
stitch length is set at 5mm)
• works with the practical and decorative stitches
• for all work where a longer stitch is required
• additional alteration of stitches possible
Sewing With the Long Stitch Function
™ select desired practical or decorative stitch
™ select Long Stitch function. Altered stitch is then
visible in the Stitch Altering Area
TIP
Decorative topstitching with cordonnet thread
• for decorative topstitching the Long Stitch function
can be combined with the triple straight stitch
• when sewing with a cordonnet thread use needle
No. 100-110 or cordonnet needle No. 90-100
40
TIP
Practical Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Long stitch for basting
The Long Stitch function in combination
with the straight stitch can be used for
basting.
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 41
Straight Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 1
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Straight Stitch
• after turning the sewing computer on, the
Practical Stitch screen with the activated straight
stitch appears
Applications
Application
• suitable presser foot to be selected according to
the technique
• suitable for all fabrics
TIP
Adjust the stitch length to suit the fabric
For example use a longer stitch length
(approximately 3 - 4mm) with denim,
a shorter length (2 - 2.5mm) with batiste.
TIP
Adjust the stitch length to suit the thread
For example use a longer stitch length
(approximately 3 - 5mm) when sewing with
ordonnet thread for topstitching.
TIP
Activate needle stop down
Prevents the fabric from slipping when you stop to
adjust stitch.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
41
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 42
Securing Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Securing stitch No. 5 (straight stitch)
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Securing Stitch
• for all fabrics
• secures beginning and the end of seam
• reverse stitching is exactly on top of the seam,
preventing puckers
Beginning the Seam
• the sewing computer secures the seam
automatically (5 stitches forward, 5 stitches
reverse)
• the sewing computer continues straight
stitching forwards
Ending the Seam
™ when coming to the end of the seam, press and
release the Quick Reverse button on head
frame. The sewing computer will then secure
the seam automatically (5 stitches forward, 5
stitches reverse)
• sewing computer stops automatically when
securing is completed
TIP
Seaming or sewing long seams
Quicker securing at beginning and end of seam.
42
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 43
Edgestitching
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 1
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, polyester, cordonnet (topstitching)
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C,
Blindstitch foot No. 5 or
Edgestitch foot No. 10 (optional accessory)
Narrow Edgestitching
Needle Position
• left for outer edge
• right for inner edge (hem edges)
Presser Foot
• Blindstitch foot No. 5
5
5
Outer Edges
™ place finished or folded edge of fabric against
the left side of the guide on the foot
™ select needle position left at desired distance
from the edge
Hem Edges
™ place edge of fold (inside upper edge of hem)
against the right side of the guide on the foot
™ select a needle position that places the stitching
along the upper edge of the folded hem
Note:
Foot No. 5: use any left or far right needle position.
Foot No. 10: use any left or right needle position.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
43
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 44
Wide Edgestitching
Needle Position
• any needle position can be used according to the
width of the stitching
• different needle positions will place the stitching at
various distances from the edge of the fabric
Presser Foot
• Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Guiding the Fabric
Presser foot as a guide:
™ align the edge of the presser foot with the
finished or folded edge of the fabric
Stitch plate as a guide:
™ guide the folded edge along the marks on the
stitch plate for stitching 3/8” to 1 1/8” (1cm–3cm)
from the edge
Seam guide as a guide:
™ insert the seam guide into the hole on the back of
the presser foot shank
™ adjust as desired, measuring from the needle
™ tighten the screw
™ guide the finished or folded edge of the fabric
along the seam guide
™ to sew parallel lines, guide the seam guide along a
previously sewn line of stitches
1
Seam guide for slide-on table:
™ insert into the groove (underside of table)
™ position right of the presser foot in the desired
distance
™ guide fabric along the seam guide
TIP
Edgestitching with seam guide
Eliminates tedious marking when sewing
parallel lines or grids.
44
TIP
Zipper foot No. 14 (optional accessory) can be
used for edgestitching when the guide on the foot
is adjusted as desired.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 45
Zippers
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Needle position:
Straight stitch No. 1
size and type suitable for the type of fabric
selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Zipper foot No. 4
far right or far left
Preparation
™ baste seam closed and finish the seam allowance
™ baste or pin zipper in place so that fabric edges
meet over the center of the zipper
4
Sewing
™ open zipper a little
™ start sewing from top left
™ position the foot so the needle stitches along
the edge of the zipper coils
™ stop in front of the pull (needle position down),
raise the presser foot and close zipper again
™ continue to sew to the base of the zipper
(needle position down)
™ turn sewing and sew across the seam (needle
position down)
™ turn sewing again and sew second side of the
zipper from bottom to top
Variation: Sew Both Sides of Zipper from
Bottom to Top
• suitable for all fabrics with nap or grain
(e.g. velvet)
™ prepare zipper as described above
™ start sewing in the seam of the zipper end and
sew first side from bottom to top
™ sew the second side the same way from bottom
to top
TIPS
Zipper as a decorative element
Sew a visible zipper into the fabric as a decorative
element.
To sew around the zipper pull
™ close the zipper and sew up to about 2” (5cm)
away from the pull
™ stop with the needle down in the fabric, raise the
presser foot. Open zipper, pulling the tab below
the needle; lower presser foot and continue to sew
TIPS
Starting to sew
Hold threads firmly when starting to sew and
pull the fabric gently behind the needle for a
few stitches.
Zipper tape or firm fabric
For even stitch formation use a 90 – 100 needle.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
45
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 46
Invisible Zipper
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Zipper length:
Straight stitch No. 1
middle
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Invisible zipper foot No. 35 (optional
accessory) and Open embroidery foot No. 20C
opening plus 1 1/2” (4cm) allowance
Invisible Zipper
• special zippers are used. When inserted they are
covered by the seam, making them invisible
• is particularly elegant when used on clothing
Sewing First Half of the Zipper
™ mark the seam beginning (zipper end)
™ open zipper fully
™ place right side of zipper on right side of fabric
(the coils point away from the fabric edge)
™ pin one half of the zipper and baste
™ lower presser foot at the beginning of the zipper
so that the zipper coils are positioned in the
groove (it may be helpful to tilt the zipper coils
slightly by hand)
™ sew first half of the zipper from top to bottom
up to the mark
46
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 47
Sewing Second Half of the Zipper
™ close zipper and pin the second half on top of
the inside
™ open zipper again, pin the entire length and
baste
™ sew from top to bottom – the zipper coils are
now positioned in the other groove
™ close zipper
Closing Seam
™ attach Open embroidery foot No. 20C (improves
overview)
™ pin and baste seam
™ sew seam from top to inserted zipper, staying as
close as possible to the zipper
™ if a small opening results, use Zipper foot No. 4
to close it (altered needle position)
TIP
Shorten zipper
Trim a zipper that is too long and secure end with
Bartack program No. 25.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
47
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 48
Triple Straight Stitch Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Triple straight stitch No. 6
Jeans or 80-90 universal
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Jeans foot No. 8
Open Seam
• durable seam for firm and densely woven
fabrics such as denim and corduroy
• reinforced seam for garment areas subject to
hard wear
TIP
For heavy layers or very densely woven fabrics:
A Jeans needle or Jeans foot No. 8 will help when
sewing very heavy fabrics, such as denim or canvas.
TIP
Decorative top stitch
Lengthen out stitch and use as a decorative top
stitch with denim.
48
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 49
Basting Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Stitch length:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Basting stitch No. 21
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
3.5 - 5mm
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Basting Stitch
• straight stitch, sewing every fourth stitch
(i.e. longest stitch possible is 20mm when the
stitch length is set at 5mm)
• for all work where a very long stitch is required
• quick and easy basting of seams, hems, quilts, etc.
• easy to remove
TIP
Securing a basting seam at the beginning and end
To secure basting stitches at the seam beginning and
end, sew a few normal length straight stitches or select
the Securing function.
TIP
Basting
Use a fine darning thread; it is easier to remove after
the seam has been sewn.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
49
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 50
Zig-zag Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Zig-zag stitch No. 2
size and type suitable for the
fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Zig-zag Stitch
• suitable for all fabrics
• overcasting
• elastic seams
• decorative sewing
Oversewing Edges
• good edge finish for most types of
fabric
™ guide edge of fabric into the
center of the presser foot
• needle goes into fabric on one side
and over the edge into the air on
the other side
™ do not select too wide a width or
too long a stitch – the edge should
lie flat and not roll
™ use a fine darning thread for
lightweight fabric
A
B
Zig-zag stitch with altered stitch width
C
Finishing the edges with zig-zag stitch
Note:
The sewing computer has a programmed
satin stitch: No. 354 (see page 143).
Oversewing edges
If edges roll, use the Vari-overlock
stitch and foot No. 2A.
50
TIP
Embroidery with satin stitch
Experiment with adjusting the stitch
width for new decorative effects.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
C
A
Zig-zag stitch with altered stitch length
Satin Stitch
• filled-in stitch used for appliqué,
embroidery, etc.
• shorten stitch length, satin stitch
setting will be indicated by parallel
lines on stitch length bar
TIP
B
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 51
Visible Hem With Triple Zig-zag Stitch
Stitch:
Stitch width:
Stitch length:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Triple Zig-zag stitch No. 7
2.5 – 9mm depending on fabric
basic setting
universal or Jeans
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Strong Visible Seam
• for firm, densely woven fabrics,
particularly good for denim and
canvas
TIP
Hems on fabrics which may ravel
Finish the raw edge of the hem; do not trim them
after sewing.
TIP
Sewing firm fabrics
Use a Jeans needle for better penetration.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
51
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 52
Blind Hem
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Blindstitch wide No. 9,
Blindstitch narrow No. 29
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, polyester, or silk
up (sewing position)
Blindstitch foot No. 5
Blind Hem Wide No. 9
• for invisible hems in medium to heavy fabrics
Blind Hem Narrow No. 29
• for invisible hems in batiste
Preparation
™ finish the raw edges as desired
™ fold the hem and baste or pin in place
™ fold the garment back over the right side of the
fabric to expose the finished lower edge (see
drawing below)
™ place the work under the presser foot with the
guide positioned against the folded back fabric
Blind hem wide
Sewing
• the needle should just pierce the edge of the
fold
™ after sewing about 4” (10cm), check both sides
of fabric and adjust the stitch width if necessary
Wrong side
of the fabric
Blind hem narrow
5
Right side of
the fabric
Wrong side of the fabric
Note:
Small stitches are visible on the
right side (decorative effect).
52
TIP
Fine stitch width adjustment
™ sew a test on the fabric. Adjust the stitch width
to suit the fabric so that the needle just pierces
the edge of the fold
™ guide the raw edge along the guide on the foot
to keep the stitch depth even
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 53
Sewing Knit Fabrics
Important Notes:
Start With a New Needle
• blunt needles can damage knits
Use a Stretch Needle (130/705 H-S)
if Necessary
• the needle point slides easily between the fibers
Use a Fine Sewing Thread
• coarse threads can damage knits and cause
holes when the garment is washed
When Basting, Use a Darning Thread
• very lightweight (80 weight) darning thread is
easier to remove once the seam is complete
Sew a Test if Necessary
• the elasticity of today’s knit fabrics varies greatly
™ adjust basic settings to suit the fabric, the seam
should be as elastic as the fabric
™ for greater elasticity use a shorter stitch length
and/or stitch width (only one of these
adjustments may be necessary)
Presser Foot Pressure
• soft, loose knits can wave when sewn:
™ reduce the pressure until the seam lies flat
• the sewing computer must still feed the fabric
properly
Problems With Sewing Knits
Seam Becomes Wavy
™ oversew a thread along the edge
™ after sewing adjust edges by pulling the thread
to regain the original length of the fabric and
press seam flat
Edges Roll
™ do not sew right on the edge but about 5mm in
from the edge
™ cut off allowance after finished sewing
How to Avoid Seam Showing Wear After Time
™ reinforce seams with a ribbon (e.g. shoulder
ribbon) before sewing
™ different ribbons are available which can stretch
more or less. These can be sewn to give more
security to the seam
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
53
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 54
Honeycomb Stitch Edges
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Honeycomb stitch No. 8
universal, ballpoint, or stretch
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Honeycomb Stitch Edges
• for all cotton, wool, synthetic and
mixed fiber knits
Preparation
™ turn the raw edge under by 3/8”
(1cm); press and baste if required
Sewing
™ sew from the right side a presser
foot away from the edge
™ trim excess fabric from the wrong
side
Balance/Corrections
The Honeycomb stitch opens up and
it does not look correct:
™ turn the stitch length knob until
the stitch in the right portion of
the screen is identical with the
stitch on the fabric
TIP
•
Needle stop down
Needle stays in fabric when pivoting
around curves (neck edges and armholes).
54
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
for more information on the
Balance function see page 177
••••••••••••••
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 55
Overlock Seams
Vari-overlock Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Vari-overlock No. 3
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Overlock foot No. 2A
Closed Seam
• elastic seam in fine, soft knits such as silk jersey
and interlock
Sewing
™ guide the raw edge along the pin on the
overlock foot
™ the stitch will form over the pin and over the
edge of the fabric
Double Overlock Seam/Jersey Overlock Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
2
Double Overlock No. 10
or Jersey Overlock No. 20
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Overlock foot No. 2A
Closed Seam
• overlock seam in loose knits and cross seams in
knits and jerseys
Sewing
™ guide the raw edge along the pin on the
overlock foot
™ the stitch will form over the pin and over the
edge of the fabrics
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
55
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 56
Stretch Overlock Seam/Reinforced Overlock Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Stretch overlock No. 13
or Reinforced overlock No. 19
universal, ballpoint or stretch
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Overlock foot No. 2A
Closed Seam
• overlock seam in coarse or loose knits
Sewing
™ sew stretch overlock along the fabric edge
™ the stitch should sew over the edge of the
fabric on the right swing of the needle
Super Stretch/Stretch Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Super stretch No. 11 or Stretch No. 18
universal, ballpoint or stretch
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Open Seam
• very elastic seam for knit fabrics
• ideal for sports and leisure wear
• seam lies flat and is not bulky
TIP
When using heavyweight fabrics sew 3/8” (1cm)
in from the edge and cut off seam allowance.
56
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 57
Flat Joining Seam
Stitch:
Needle:
Thraed:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Stretch overlock No. 13
universal, ballpoint or stretch
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Flat Joining Seam
™ fabric edges are overlapped and the stitch is
placed on the seam allowance which produces
a very flat, durable seam
• ideal for fluffy, thick materials such as terry
cloth, felt and leather
Sewing
™ sew stretch overlock along the fabric edge
• the stitch should sew over the edge of the top
layer of fabric on the right swing of the needle
TIP
Fabric and thread
When using a matching thread color, this
seam is hardly visible in fluffy fabrics.
TIP
Thick seam
Particularly suitable for fabrics in which a normal
straight stitch seam would stretch open.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
57
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 58
Hems With Practical Stitches
Visible Hem With Jersey Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Jersey stitch No. 14
universal, ballpoint or stretch
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Visible Stretch Hem
• for all types of cotton, wool, synthetic and
mixed fiber jerseys
Preparation
™ fold and press hem; baste if required
Sewing
™ sew hem at desired depth (right side)
™ trim excess fabric (wrong side)
58
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 59
Ribbing With Overlock Seams
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Vari-overlock No. 3
size and type suitable for the
fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Overlock foot No. 2A
Ribbing With Overlock Seam
• for all fine cotton, synthetic and
mixed fiber knits
Right side
Preparation
™ cut ribbing twice the finished
width plus double the seam
allowance
™ fold ribbing in half
™ pin and baste to opening, front
edge to outside
Sewing
™ sew vari-overlock over the raw
edge
™ guide the raw edge along the pin
of the foot
™ the stitch will form over the pin
and over the edge of the fabric
TIP
Preventing the ribbing from becoming wavy
Cut ribbing slightly shorter than the opening
and pull slightly when pinning.
Wrong side
TIP
Needle stop down
Needle stays in fabric when pivoting around
curves (neck edges and armholes).
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
59
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 60
Hems With Double Needle
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 1
double needle
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Hem Finish in Knits
• elastic hems in knits
• no additional overcasting necessary
Preparation
™ turn the raw edge under the width desired;
press and baste, if required
™ insert double needle into the sewing computer
and thread; threading see page 16
™ recall Security Program, select suitable double
needle and stitch plate (appropriate double
needle limitation – e.g. for a double needle of
4mm select double needle button 4.0)
Sewing
™ sew on the right side along the seam edge (on
the right side two parallel stitch lines are visible,
on the wrong side a zig-zag stitch is visible)
™ trim excessive fabric back to about 2mm from
the stitches
TIP
TIP
TIP
Exact sewing
Use guide line on stitch plate or seam guide.
Adjusting stitch length
Increase stitch length according to fabric.
More elastic seam
Use wooly nylon as bobbin thread which results in
a more elastic seam.
60
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 61
Ribbing Finish
Ribbing
•
•
decorative and very practical way of finishing the
edges
suitable for sweatshirts, pajamas – either way, etc.
Cutting
™ width: twice the finished width plus double the
seam allowance
™ length: desired length plus double the seam
allowance
™ check length by putting the ribbing folded in half
around neck, waist, wrist, or ankle (check whether
ribbing around the neck is wide enough to be
pulled over the head)
Preparation / Sewing
™ make a circle out of the ribbing and sew
according to seam allowance (chose suitable
overlock stitch according to fabric)
™ fold the ribbing in half, the seam to inside (baste
edges)
™ divide ribbing in four equal sections and mark
quarters (mark No. 1 is the seam)
™ divide edge of the garment also in four equal
sections and mark quarters
™ pin right side of ribbing to right side of garment,
the four marks matching. The ribbing seam should
be placed to the back or on shoulder seam
™ sew with a machine overlock stitch (according to
fabric)
TIP
Using ready-made ribbing
The job is made easier as there is no cutting.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
61
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 62
Reinforced Edges on Woven Fabrics
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Honeycomb stitch No. 8
or Running stitch No. 4
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
lightweight darning thread
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Reinforced Edges
• good for work clothes, table linen, towels, etc.
• use a cord to match the color of the fabric.
This gives additional strength
Suitable Cords
• Perle cotton
• fine crochet yarn
• strong hand-sewing thread
• gimp (not from home dec department)
Sewing
™ oversew edges with Honeycomb or Running
stitch by oversewing a cord along the edge for
added reinforcement
™ if necessary sew a second row further in
from the edge
62
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 63
Sewing on Elastic, Shirring Elastic/Cord
Gathering
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Gathering stitch No. 12
size and type to suit the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Buttonhole foot No. 3C
Shirring Elastic/Cord
• for gathering lengths of fabric, for finishing
children’s and doll clothing, crafts, etc.
Preparation
™ cut shirring elastic or cord double the length of
the edge and fold in half lengthways
™ hook over the center toe on the buttonhole foot
™ take both ends of the cord under the foot to the
back
™ shirring elastic/cord lies in the openings of the
buttonhole foot
Sewing
™ sew a few stitches
™ lift the elastic or cord at the front and pull
towards you, leave ends behind the presser foot
™ oversew cord without stitching into it
™ stretch elastic while sewing; the more it is
stretched, the tighter the gathers
™ after sewing, pull the cord to gather the fabric
TIP
Securing beginning and end
Sew a few stitches with the feed
dog lowered.
TIP
Presser foot pressure
Increase the foot pressure for better feeding
of the fabric and cord if necessary.
TIP
Gathering of long lengths of fabric
Use two separate gathering cords instead
of one hooked over the center toe.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
63
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 64
Sewing on Elastic, Shirring Elastic/Cord
Sewing on Narrow Elastic With Universal Stitch
Stitch:
Stitch width:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Universal stitch No. 15
depends on width of elastic
type and size to suit the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Embroidery foot No. 6 (optional accessory)
Sewing on Elastic
• for gathering long lengths of fabric
• for ruffles and flounces in fine fabrics, outer
garments, sportswear, children’s and doll
clothing, crafts, etc.
• works well for gathered sleeve edges and neck
openings
Preparation
™ cut elastic to length required
Sewing
™ oversew the elastic, adjusting the stitch width
to be slightly wider than the elastic
• needle must not pierce the elastic
™ after sewing, adjust the gathers evenly
TIP
TIP
Secure the beginning and end of elastic
Sew a few straight stitches backwards and forwards
to secure the elastic.
Quick hem finish
• for children’s or doll clothing
™ sew sleeve edges with elastic before sewing seams
64
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 65
Sewing on Elastic, Shirring Elastic/Cord
Sewing on Wide Elastic
Stitch:
Stitch length:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Needle stop:
Running stitch No. 4 or
Sewn-out zig-zag No. 16 or
Lycra stitch No. 17
adjust to suit elastic
size and type to suit the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
down
Wide Elastic
• for edges on sportswear and lingerie
Preparation
™ cut elastic to length desired
™ divide fabric edge and elastic into 4 equal
sections and mark
™ pin elastic to raw edge, matching up marks
Sewing
™ stretch the elastic to fit the raw edge while
sewing
™ trim excess fabric close to the stitching
TIP
Gather edges first
™ first sew two parallel straight stitches about
5mm apart for about 2” (5cm)
™ knot the beginning of the threads
™ hold bobbin thread, gather fabric
™ to begin the elastic can be sewn on flat
without being stretched
TIP
Preventing elastic from stretching too much
™ Avoid over-stretching the elastic; adjust the
presser foot pressure to suit the fabric.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
65
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 66
Sewing on Elastic, Shirring Elastic/Cord
Elastic Edges
Stitch:
Stitch width:
Stitch length:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Zig-zag stitch No. 2
approximately 5mm
1–1.5mm
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Elastic Edges
• use on knit garments to re-form out-of-shape
edges
Sewing
™ guide double length of shirring elastic along the
edge of the fabric, stretching the elastic slightly
™ oversew the elastic with a zig-zag stitch (do not
sew through the elastic, only over it)
™ adjust elastic after sewing is complete to regain
the correct shape and size
TIP
Prevent fabrics stretching
To prevent the fabric from stretching
as it is sewn, reduce the presser foot
pressure to suit the fabric.
66
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 67
Automatic Darning
Quick Darning of Holes or Worn Areas
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Simple darning program No. 22,
Reinforced darning program No. 23
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
lightweight darning thread
up (sewing position)
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A,
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C (only for Darning
program No. 22)
Simple Darning Program No. 22
replaces threads along the lengthwise grain in all fabrics
Preparation
™ use Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
™ select Stitch Counter icon on the toolbar on the lower
part of the screen
™ place a piece of lightweight stabilizer under the worn
area before darning if necessary
Sewing
™ sew the first row and stop
™ press and release the Quick Reverse button at the
desired length; this programs the first length
™ continue sewing; the sewing computer stops
automatically
Note:
The Simple darning program No. 22 can also be done with the
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A (see following description).
Reinforced Darning Program No. 23
replaces threads along the lengthwise and crosswise
grains in all fabrics
Preparation
™ use Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
™ place a piece of lightweight stabilizer under the worn
area before darning if necessary
TIP
Sewing
™ insert the needle in the top left of the worn area
™ sew the first vertical row
™ press and release the Quick Reverse button at the
desired length; this programs the length needed
™ continue sewing; the sewing computer stops
automatically when finished
If the darning does not cover the whole worn or
damaged area
Reposition the work under the foot to continue covering
the worn or damaged area. Begin sewing; the program
will repeat as often as desired (the length is saved).
TIP
If the darning becomes distorted
Correct with the Balance function see
page 177.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
67
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 68
Manual Darning
Stitch:
Neddle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 1
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
lightweight darning thread
down (darning position)
Darning foot No. 9 (optional accessory)
Manual Darning
• darning holes or worn areas
• replaces threads with the lengthwise and the
crosswise grains in all fabrics
Preparation
™ stretch fabric into darning hoop to prevent
distortion
™ use of the slide-on table is recommended
Note:
Place suitable material
under a large area.
Sewing
™ move the darning hoop smoothly by hand
™ work from left to right without using pressure
™ when changing direction on top and on bottom,
move in curves (avoid points as this prevents
holes and thread breakage)
™ work in different lengths so that the thread is
«lost» in the fabric
1. Stitch Over the Hole
™ sew the first rows to cover the hole (not too
close, sewing beyond the worn area)
™ work the rows in irregular lengths
™ turn work by a quarter turn – 90°
2. Cover the First Rows
™ sew over the first rows – not too close for a soft
finish
™ turn work by a half turn –180°
1
3. Complete Darning
™ loosely and in same direction as 2nd rows
TIP
Poor stitch formation
• if the thread is lying on the right
side of the fabric, the hoop is
being moved too quickly
• if there are knots on the wrong
side of the fabric, the hoop is
being moved too slowly
TIP
2
Thread breaks
If thread breakage is a problem, it
could be that the hoop is not being
moved smoothly.
3
68
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 69
Patching Knits and Jersey
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Jersey stitch No. 14
size and type suitable for the
fabric selected
lightweight darning thread
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Covering Worn or Damaged Areas
• particularly suitable for knit fabrics, lingerie
Preparation
™ do not cut damaged area
™ round off the edges of the patch to retain flexibility
™ pin and baste to right side
Sewing
™ place patch over worn area
™ sew over edge
™ sew a second row inside the first if required
™ cut away damaged area
TIP
Knits
Use a new needle to prevent damage
of the fabric loops.
TIP
Sewing stretch fabrics
™ place a stabilizer under the fabric
™ if necessary use a stretch needle (130/705 H-S);
point slides easily between the fibers
™ to prevent the stretching of the seam while
being sewn, reduce the presser foot pressure to
suit the fabric
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
69
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 70
Freehand Embroidery
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 1 or Zig-zag stitch No. 2
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
embroidery thread, lightweight thread in
bobbin
down (darning position)
Darning foot No. 9 (optional accessory) or
Freehand embroidery foot No. 24 (optional
accessory)
Freehand Embroidery
• freehand embroidery is used for creative
designing. With the Straight stitch No. 1 or
Zig-zag stitch No. 2 the surface of the fabric
can be covered with narrow or wide stitches
• use fine to mediumweight fabrics
Preparation
™ draw desired motif with a pencil or marker on
the fabric
™ place stabilizer under fabric
™ stretch fabric and stabilizer into wooden
embroidery hoop (optional accessory)
™ use slide-on table
Note:
If a thick decorative thread is used as
bobbin thread, an extra bobbin case
should be purchased.
9
Sewing
™ stitch length: set on 0 and reduce upper thread
tension slightly
™ use Zig-zag stitch No. 2 to cover the surface of the
fabric and set stitch width according to motif
™ use Straight stitch No. 1 for sewing straight lines
™ it is recommended to start with a circular motion,
until some practice is gained
™ hold hoop with both hands and move smoothly.
To move up and down is easier than embroidering
sideways; turn hoop to embroider sideways
™ embroider rows of stitches next to each other
according to desired density
™ move with regular, consistent speed, if the thread
lies loose on the right side of the fabric, the stitch
area was moved too fast. If there are little knots on
the wrong side, the stitch area was moved too
slowly
TIP
Freehand embroidery on a water-soluble stabilizer
Motifs can also be embroidered on water-soluble stabilizer.
Make sure that the stitches overlap so that the edge is
firmly woven. Wash out the stabilizer afterwards, appliqué
the motif onto a project.
70
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
TIP
Additional designing possibilities
Use different threads and fabrics.
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 71
Bartack Program
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Bartack program No. 24 or No. 25
size and type to suit the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Bartack Program
• for reinforcing zippers, pocket edges, sewing on
belt loops
• use for attaching ribbons to a quilt for tying
Sewing
• the sewing computer starts top left with the
bartack program and automatically stops at the
end of the program
TIP
Decorative bartacks
Increase the stitch length and sew the bartack
program with decorative thread as a decorative
element; or combine two together at right
angles to each other as decoration.
TIP
Shorten zipper
A zipper that is too long can be trimmed and
reinforced by using the Bartack program No. 25.
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
71
s035-72_e
19.4.2004
16:12 Uhr
Seite 72
Fly Stitches
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Fly stitch No. 26 and No. 27
size and type to suit the fabric
selected
cotton, decorative or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Fly Stitches
The fly stitch is used as reinforcement at the end of
seams, e.g. pocket edges or slits
• stitch No. 26 is for mediumweight to thick fabric
• stitch No. 27 is for fine to mediumweight fabric
Sewing
™ place presser foot No. 1C in the middle of the
seam at the end of the slit or the pocket edge
™ the fly stitch is automatically sewn from bottom
to top (in reverse)
™ the sewing computer stops automatically at the
end
TIP
Hand-stitched effect
To get a hand-stitched effect the fly stitch can be
sewn with a heavier thread.
TIP
The fly stitch can also be used as a decorative effect.
72
Practical Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 73
Stitch Summary 74
Important Decorative Sewing
Information 75
Decorative Stitches 9mm 76
Decorative Stitches in
Combination With Functions 77
Combining Practical and
Decorative Stitches 79
Cross Stitches 81
Heirloom Techniques 82
Hemstitches 83
Pintucks 84
Scallops Off the Edge 87
Corded Scallops 88
Sideways Motion Stitches 89
• General facts • Using templates for
manual combining • Automatic connecting
with 16 Directional Sewing
16 Directional Sewing 94
Connecting Stitches 95
4 Directional Sewing 96
Decorative Stitches
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 74
Decorative Stitches
9mm, 40mm, 16 Directional Sewing and 4 Directional Sewing
Decorative Stitches,
16 and 4 sewing directions
™ press Decorative Stitch button, 16/4 directions
Summary
Summary
• The following list of categories appears:
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
Category
•
74
101...
= «Nature» decorative stitches, 9mm
201… = «Nature» decorative stitches, 40mm
301… = Cross stitches, 9mm
401… = Home dec stitches, 9mm
501… = Satin and quilting stitches, 40mm
601… = Machine embellishment
701… = Heirloom stitches, 9mm
801… = Heirloom stitches, 40mm
901… = «Children» decorative stitches, 9mm
1015… = «Children» decorative stitches, 40mm
1101… = Zodiacs
16 Directions Sewing
4 Directions Sewing
for a complete list of stitches, refer to page 260-263
Decorative Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 75
Important Decorative Sewing Information
Selecting Decorative Stitches
™ press Decorative Stitch button
• a complete overview appears on the screen:
101,…, 301,…, 401, …, 601, …, 701, …, 901, …
= decorative stitches 9mm (decorative stitches of up to 9mm
stitch width)
• 201, …, 501, …, 801, … 1015, …, 1101, …
= sideways motion stitches (marked with 4 arrows); sideways
motion stitches are large stitches or outline designs which are
sewn with the fabric being fed sideways, as well as forward
and backward
• 4 Directional Sewing, 16 Directional Sewing:
automatic feed in 4 or 16 directions
™ touch the appropriate button to select and activate the
desired category
™ select the desired stitch
•
Application of Various Decorative Stitches
Depending on the type of fabric, select simple or more
complicated decorative stitches to enhance the fabric.
™ lightweight fabrics
• use simple decorative stitches for a particularly nice effect
on lightweight fabric (e.g. Decorative stitch No. 101)
™ mediumweight fabrics
• simple and more complicated decorative stitches programmed with triple straight stitch or with a few satin
stitches - are particularly suitable for mediumweight
fabrics (e.g. Decorative stitch No. 107)
™ heavyweight fabrics
• use more intricate decorative stitches - programmed with
satin stitches - on heavyweight fabrics for outstanding
decorative stitching (e.g. Decorative stitch No. 401)
Perfect Stitch Formation
™ use the same needle and bobbin thread color
™ use a stabilizer on the wrong side of the fabric for perfect
stitch formation
™ use an additional, water soluble stabilizer on the right side
of pile or longfiber fabrics (e.g. wool, velvet, etc.)
Decorative Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
75
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 76
Decorative Stitches
9mm
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Decorative stitches 9mm
size and type suitable for the
fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C,
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Decorative Stitches
• for any material
• to decorate and embellish
Applications
1
Stitch Selection
™ press Decorative Stitches button
™ select the desired stitch folder on screen
(group 100, 300, 400, 600, 700 and 900 are
9mm stitches)
™ select the desired stitch
Altering the Stitch Width (1)
Altering the Stitch Length (2)
• for decorative effects and stitch
adjustments (e.g. in bulky places)
™ longer = turn the external stitch
length knob clockwise
™ shorter = turn the external stitch
length knob counter clockwise
• default settings and the alterations
made will be displayed on screen
™ reset default settings = touch the
stitch width or length bar or turn the
external knobs
for decorative effects and stitch adjustments
(e.g. in bulky places)
™ wider = turn the external stitch width knob
clockwise
™ narrower = turn the external stitch width knob
counter clockwise
• default settings and the alterations made will be
displayed on screen
™ reset default settings = touch the stitch width or
length bar or turn the external knobs
•
TIP
Saving altered default settings
™ save the stitch with its altered settings in your
Personal Program
™ change the factory settings of the stitch
permanently
76
2
Screen
• the stitch width and length is highlighted in blue
• default settings (stitch length and width) can be
altered
•
for more details on Personal Program see page
150 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
for more information see page 24-25 •••••••••••
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 77
Combining Decorative Stitches and Functions
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Decorative stitches 9mm
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Create amazing effects by combining decorative
stitches and functions.
Instructions
™ select desired stitch
™ select desired function
• the altered stitch is displayed on screen
• a single stitch can be combined with several
functions
Deleting Functions
™ press the external «clr» button or delete
special functions individually by touching the
corresponding functions on the screen
Mirroring Decorative Stitches
™ touch the Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)
function
• the stitch is mirrored left/right
™ touch the Vertical Mirror Image (up/down)
function
• the stitch is mirrored in the sewing direction,
up/down
™ touch both Mirror functions simultaneously
• the stitch is mirrored vertically and horizontally
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
77
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 78
Altering Decorative Stitches With
Long Stitch Function (1)
™ press the Long Stitch function
• the sewing computer will sew every
alternate stitch
• the completely changed stitch will be
displayed on the screen
Stretching Decorative Stitches With
Pattern Extend Function (2)
™ touch the Pattern Extend function
once or more
• the selected stitch is extended (i.e.
stretched) two- to fivefold
• some stitches have limited extension
capability, and thus cannot be
stretched to 3 to 5 times their
previous size
1
2
3
4
Sewing With a Double, Triple or
Wing Needle (3)
™ on inserting the specialty needle
activate the Security Program
•
for more details on Security
Program see page 32 ••••••••
•
when selecting the stitch, the stitch
width is automatically limited
according to the needle chosen
the best effects are achieved with
simple stitches
•
Balance (4)
• use the Balance function for
various effects (stitch variations)
•
for more details on the Balance
function see page 177-178 ••••••
TIP
Add «Pattern End»/«Pattern Repeat»
™ touch the Pattern End button on head frame: the sewing computer will
stop at the end of an individual stitch or the active stitch in a combination
™ touch the Pattern Repeat 1-9x function on the screen: the sewing computer
will stop on completion of the number of single repeats entered
78
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 79
Practical and Decorative Stitches in the Combi Mode
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Decorative and Practical stitches 9mm
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
™ select «Combi Mode»
• the Combi Mode opens, and is ready to create
stitch combinations
Note:
Most of the practical and decorative stitches can be
combined, except for the following special programs:
Securing program No. 324
Securing stitch No. 5
Basting No. 21
Darning No. 22 and No. 23
Bartacks No. 24 and No. 25
Fly stitches No. 26 and No. 27
Stitches in the buttonhole category Nos. 51 - 63
Combining Practical and Decorative Stitches
™ select desired stitch
• stitch appears in the stitch display
™ select another stitch
™ continue in this way until the desired stitch combination is
completed
• Preview of Combination see page 156 ••••••••••••••••••••
Example of a Stitch Combination
™ Machine Embellishment stitches: touch stitch No. 655 once
™ open Practical Stitches window and touch Straight stitch
No. 1 once
™ open Decorative Stitches window and touch stitch No. 606 in
Machine Embellishment stitches once
™ open Practical Stitches window and touch Straight stitch
No. 1 once
™ the stitches alternate continuously as you sew
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
79
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 80
Example of a Stitch and Function Combination
™ touch stitch No. 656 once
™ touch stitch No. 656 again and activate Vertical
Mirror Image function to mirror the stitch in the
sewing direction
• the stitch is mirrored in the sewing direction
• the stitches alternate in their original and mirrored
form as you sew
Stitch Combination as Single or Multiple Repeat
™ create stitch combination
™ touch «Pattern Repeat 1 - 9» one or more times (the
corresponding number from 1 - 9 appears)
• sewing computer will stop automatically at the end
of the programmed number of stitch combination
repeats
Correcting a Combination
Inserting Stitches
• stitches are always inserted above the cursor
• to insert a stitch at the beginning of a stitch combination,
move the cursor upwards, using the scroll arrow
™ activate desired place = select desired stitch in the Stitch
Altering Area or scroll to the stitch
™ select new stitch
• stitch is inserted above the cursor
Deleting Stitches
stitches are always deleted above the cursor
™ activate desired place by selecting desired stitch in the Stitch
Altering Area or scroll to the stitch
™ touch «Delete»
• stitch is deleted
•
•
«Saving Combinations» see
page 154 ••••••••••••••••••••••
TIP
TIP
™ touch Multifunction button
™ touch «Mirror Combination»
• the complete combination is
mirrored left/right
There are various options for automatically securing stitches:
1. touch «Securing» before beginning to sew:
securing stitches are stitched at beginning of stitch
combination
2. touch «Securing» at end of the stitching:
securing stitches are stitched at end of stitch combination
3. programming a function within a stitch combination:
the desired stitches are secured accordingly
Mirroring complete
combination left/right
80
Add Securing function
(4 small securing stitches)
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 81
Cross Stitches
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Cross stitches No. 301 - 314
size and type suitable for the fabric
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
•
•
cross stitching is a traditional technique, and
extends the range of decorative stitches
if the cross stitches are sewn on fabric with a
linen texture, they acquire a hand-stitched effect
and look like hand-stitched cross stitching
Application
for home furnishings
• for trimmings on garments
• for embellishing in general
•
Sewing
™ Cross stitches Nos. 301 - 314 can be stitched
and combined like any other decorative stitches
Sewing Trims
™ select cross stitch
™ stitch a row, using the seam guide or slide-on
table seam guide
• it is important to stitch the first row in a straight
line, as it will serve as a reference for the rows
that follow
™ select a new stitch
™ stitch a second row next to first at a distance of
one presser foot's width, or using the seam
guide
™ repeat for the following rows of stitching
TIP
Use cotton embroidery thread for cross stitching
Stitch appears fuller.
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
81
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 82
Heirloom Techniques / Sewing Lace
Heirloom Sewing
•
•
•
is one of the oldest and most traditional
needlework techniques
embellishments such as lace of a matching shade
are sewn on white cotton or linen to be used in
making home furnishings and garments
heirloom embroidery includes - among others techniques like hemstitching, attaching and
inserting lace, padded satin scallops
Attaching and Inserting Lace
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Zig-zag No. 2
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or Edge stitch foot No.10C (special accessory)
Preparation
™ use the same color thread as the lace
• lace which has been spray-starched before
stitching is easier to use
Attaching Lace to Fabric
™ place lace on right side of the fabric, edges
overlapping at least 3/8” (1cm)
(= seam allowance) and pin
• lace header lies on the fabric
™ use Straight stitch No. 1 to attach lace
™ press seam allowance back to wrong side of fabric
™ from the right side, use a narrow zig-zag (stitch
width approx. 11/2 - 21/2, length approx. 1/2) to
sew on lace. Stitch along the edge of the lace so
that the stitches enclose the edge
™ trim excess fabric on wrong side
Attaching Lace to Lace
™ place pieces of lace next to each
other (edges touching exactly)
™ use a fine zig-zag stitch (stitch
width approx. 11/2 - 2, length
approx. 1/2) to sew the pieces
of lace together. The needle
swing should alternately catch
the two lace edges. Use the
Edge stitch foot No. 10
82
Inserting Lace into Fabric
™ pin or baste lace onto fabric. Use
Straight stitch No. 1 to
stitch along both edges
™ carefully slit open the fabric in the
center between the seam lines
™ press the seam allowances back
to the wrong side of the fabric
™ from the right side of the fabric,
use a fine zig-zag (stitch width
approx. 11/2- 2, length approx.
1/2) along both lace edges to
enclose them
™ trim excess fabric on wrong side
Entredeux
Attaching Entredeux to Fabric
™ place Entredeux on fabric, right
sides together, raw edges
together
™ stitch Entredeux to fabric using
straight stitch, Edge stitch foot
No. 10 (special accessory), guiding
the guide in center of foot along
seam allowance bead in Entredeux
™ trim seam allowance to 1/8”(3mm)
™ overcast raw edge of Entredeux/fabric seam with a
narrow zig-zag stitch (stitch No. 2, stitch width
2mm, stitch length 1.5mm)
Attaching Entredeux to Lace, etc.
™ trim away seam allowance of Entredeux along one
bead only
™ follow technique lace to lace as desrcibed above
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 83
Heirloom Techniques / Hemstitching
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Hemstitch Nos. 701, 702, 709 - 711, 713, 720,
721, 723, 725, 726, 732, 742
Wing needle, Double wing needle
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open Embroidery foot No. 20C
Hemstitches
• use the wing needle to achieve excellent open effects easily
• loosely woven, light- to mediumweight woven fabrics in
which the penetrating needle can easily push the threads
apart are especially suitable for hemstitching
• for home furnishings and garments
Preparation
™ use fusible stabilizer on wrong side of fabric to reinforce it
• depending on fabric and required effect, use more than one
layer of stabilizer
™ insert wing needle or double wing needle and activate
appropriate needle limitation in Security Program
•
1
for more details on Security Program see page 32 •••••••••••
Using the Wing Needle (1)
• the «normal» wing needle can be used for any hemstitching
™ select a hemstitch and sew
1
Using the Double Wing Needle (2)
• the wing-needle part of the special double needle creates a
hole effect, while the universal-needle part creates a normal
straight stitch effect
™ select desired stitch (e.g. Triple zig-zag No.7) and stitch first
row
™ turn fabric and stitch second row. The needle should
penetrate the holes of the first row
2
Pulling Threads Out (3)
™ for an even more pronounced hand-stitched effect, withdraw
threads of the fabric before starting to hemstitch
™ you may wish to spray-starch the fabric and press carefully
before beginning stitching
™ the hemstitches are sewn next to the «gaps» left by the
withdrawn threads
• to fagot the threads, the needle must alternately penetrate
the fabric and the gap or ditch created by withdrawing the
threads
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
2
3
83
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 84
Heirloom Techniques / Pintucks
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot
Straight stitch No. 1
Double needle 1-4mm, depending on the Pintuck presser
foot used and the fabric
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Pintuck feet No. 30 (3 grooves), No. 31 (5 grooves),
No. 32 (7 grooves), or No. 33 (9 grooves)
(all the feet are special accessories)
Stitching Pintucks
• this technique reduces the size of the fabric area
(allow for enough fabric)
• pintucks are narrow stitched folds which are
normally sewn on the fabric before cutting out
the pieces for garments or other sewing projects
• for embellishing, or in combination with other
heirloom embroidery techniques
Pintuck Presser Feet
•
•
•
•
No. 30 (3 grooves) = 4mm double needle:
for heavyweight fabrics
No. 31 (5 grooves) = 3mm double needle:
for medium- to heavyweight fabrics
No. 32 (7 grooves) = 2mm double needle:
for light- to mediumweight fabrics
No. 33 (9 grooves) = 1 or 1.6mm double needle:
for very light fabrics (uncorded pintucks)
Corded Pintucks
• pintucks may be sewn with or without cord
• cord pintucks for a raised effect and texture
• choose a cord that fits well into the grooves
of the selected pintuck foot
• the cord must be colorfast and shrinkproof
84
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Note:
Sewing pintucks on
fabric causes fabric
width to reduce.
Allow extra fabric
for this technique.
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 85
Inserting the Cord (gimp cord)
™ remove stitch plate from sewing computer (see page 17)
™ open bobbin cover
™ thread cord from underneath plate through the bobbin area
and the hole in stitch plate
™ replace stitch plate
™ close bobbin cover
• the cord should feed freely - guide it through the small
opening in the bobbin cover
™ place the cord spool on the arm of the free hand system
(presser foot lifter)
™ check that the cord runs smoothly
Threading the Needle
™ insert double needle
™ activate the double needle limitation
(corresponding to needle size used) in the Security Program
•
for more details on Security Program see page 32 •••••••••••
™ thread both needles
•
for more details on Threading the Double Needle see page 16
••••••••••••••••••••••
Stitching the Pintucks
™ stitch first tuck - you may want to mark the line first
• the filler cord will automatically feed into the pintuck
™ turn work if required
™ place first pintuck in one of the side grooves in the presser
foot (depending on the desired distance)
™ stitch second pintuck
• stitch additional pintucks parallel to these two
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
85
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 86
Stitching Corners
• with a double needle the fabric cannot simply
be pivoted at corners. Corners must therefore
be sewn in several steps:
™ with the double needle in the fabric, turn the
handwheel until the needles are just above the
fabric (the eye appears, but the point is still in
the fabric)
™ pivot the fabric halfway into the corner (45°),
make one stitch, bring the needle back to the
same position (just above the fabric)
™ pivot the fabric another 45° and continue
stitching
• for a pointed corner, simply repeat the steps
until the desired angle is reached
Shaped Pintucks
• in addition to straight lines, pintucks may also
be stitched in wavy lines as desired
Combining Decorative Stitches and Pintucks
™ if you wish to place rows of decorative stitching
directly between pintucks, use Reverse pattern
foot No. 1C to stitch them before sewing the
pintucks
™ use a removable stabilizer under the work and
remove it after the decorative stitching is
completed
™ stitch pintucks on the left and right of the
decorative stitching as required and as described
above
TIP
Seam guide
Use the seam guide for evenly spaced pintucks,
especially for more widely spaced ones.
86
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 87
Heirloom Techniques / Scallops Off the Edge
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Padded satin stitch No. 416
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Open embroidery foot No. 20C or
Embroidery foot No. 6 (special accessory)
Padded Satin Scallops
• an «airy» finish for any finished edge
• for garments, table and bed linens
Preparation
™ to create padded satin scallops «in the air», i.e.
off the edge, place watersoluble or tear-away
stabilizer under the fabric, allowing to protrude
clearly at the edge
™ pin or baste stabilizer to fabric
™ place filler cord spool (e.g. Perle cotton No. 8)
on FHS lifter
• the filler cord, which stabilizes the scallops,
should be the same color as the thread used to
make the scallops, as well as be colorfast and
shrinkproof
™ thread the filler cord from underneath the stitch
plate through the hole in the stitch plate
•
for more information on Inserting Gimp Cord see page 85 ••••••••••••••
Stitching
™ stitch the first row of scallops
• the scallops always begin and end on the fabric
edge, with the curve being stitched on the
stabilizer
• if the scallops do not begin and end on the
fabric, they will not be attached to it
™ add 2 to 3 more rows of scallops as desired
• with additional rows, the scallop begins and
ends in each case in the middle of the scallop of
the previous row
• if the scallop stitch does not begin or end in the
middle of the scallop of the previous row, the
rows will not hold together
™ carefully remove the stabilizer on completion of
the stitching
TIP
Perfect sewing results
As the padded satin scallop off the edge technique
requires some practice, always sew a test.
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
87
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 88
Heirloom Techniques / Corded Scallops
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Satin scallop stitch No. 507, 508
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C, and
Open Embroidery foot No. 20C, or
Embroidery foot No. 6 (special accessory)
Corded Scallops
• a decorative edge finish for garments and table
and bed linens
•
for more information
on Sideways Motion
Stitches see page 90
Corded scallops
Pre-stitching
™ place stabilizer under fabric edge
™ with foot No. 40C, stitch a row of satin scallops
approx. 3/8” (1cm) from the edge, using the
seam guide or slide-on table seam guide to help
you stitch straight
•••••••••••••
Trim Fabric
™ once all the satin scallops are completed,
carefully trim excess fabric
Overstitching Corded Scallops
™ insert presser foot No. 20C, and place filler cord
spool (e.g. Perle cotton No. 8) on the FHS lifter
• the filler cord, which stabilizes the scallops, must
be the same color as the thread used to make
the scallops, as well as colorfast and shrinkproof
™ use Zig-zag stitch No. 2 (stitch width approx. 5,
length approx. 1/2 - 1) to overstitch the scallops,
guiding the filler cord along the stitching
• the needle swing will alternately penetrate the
scallop stitching and the fabric just next to the
cord
™ slightly narrow the stitch width at the end of
each scallop. Sew last few stitches to end of
scallop, turn fabric slightly (with the needle
down), then sew a few stitches, and widen stitch
width again to sew the broad part of the scallop
TIP
Simplified overstitching of the scallops
™ reduce sewing speed when overstitching
corded scallops (using Motor Speed
function)
™ activate the Needle Stop Down function
which is a big help when overstitching
88
Pre-stitching corded
scallops
TIP
Reinforced Satin Scalloped
Edge
Use double cord.
Decorative Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Overstitching corded
scallops
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:21 Uhr
Seite 89
Sideways Motion Stitches
In General
Sideways Motion Stitches
• sideways motion stitches are large stitches which are sewn
with the fabric being fed sideways, as well as forwards and
backwards
™ touch desired stitch to activate it
• sideways motion stitches are depicted with 4 arrows in the
Stitch Altering Area
• start (green point) and end (read cross) are visible in the Stitch
Altering Area
•
•
with some individual stitches (e.g. Single motif No. 218), the
sewing computer stops automatically
other stitches (e.g. No. 808) can be stitched continuously
Templates as Sewing Aid
• the templates enclosed with the owner’s manual help to
position the stitches on the fabric
• all sideways motion stitches are printed in their original size
on the template
• the starting point of the individual stitches is marked with a
circle, the end with a cross. The beginning and end are also
provided with a hole (so that they can be accurately marked
on the fabric)
• the starting and end are also shown on screen, once the stitch
is selected, in the Stitch Altering Area
• the sewing direction is indicated by a presser foot symbol and
thin guide lines
• the presser foot must always run parallel to the guide lines
™ place the template on the fabric to mark the starting point of
the desired stitch
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
89
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 90
Sewing Sideways Motion Stitches
™ use the slide-on table to enlarge sewing area
™ insert needle at starting point (pay attention to sewing
direction on template)
™ position fabric so that guide lines on template run parallel to
presser foot, then remove template
™ stitch: the sewing computer will stitch the selected stitch
• make sure that the fabric feeds freely and evenly - it must not
be inhibited (must not bump into anything, or drag)
• it is important to let the sewing computer stitch without
«helping» it by pushing, pulling or holding the fabric back
• before starting to stitch, it might be helpful to draw a line on
the fabric in the same direction as the template lines to serve
as a guide for parallel stitching
Combining Sideways Motion Stitches and Functions
™ sideways motion stitches can be combined with all functions
active on the screen (e.g. «Mirror Image»)
• the size of most sideways motion stitches cannot be altered
(noticeable by different color of Stitch Width and Stitch Length
Indication)
Balance
• depending on type of fabric, stabilizer and thread quality, the
stitches may differ slightly from the original
• use the Balance function to match the selected stitch to the
fabric used
•
for more information on Balance see page 178 ••••••••••••••
TIP
Test sewing
It is always a good idea to test sew with the materials
you intend to use - fabric, stabilizer, and threads.
90
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 91
Sideways Motion Stitches
Combining Manually With Templates
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Sideways motion stitches
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Using Templates to Position Sideways Motion
Stitches
™ use templates to position the sideways motion
stitch on the desired place on the fabric
™ transfer the starting point (circle) of the stitch to
the fabric
Sewing
™ use the slide-on table to enlarge the sewing area
™ select sideways motion stitch in Single Mode
™ place sideways motion presser foot on the fabric as
shown on the template so that needle will go through
starting point of the stitch
™ stitch
Continuous Sideways Motion Stitch as Single Repeat
™ touch Pattern End 1-9x function once («1» appears in display):
sewing computer stops automatically
Using the Template to Add an Additional Sideways Motion
Stitch
™ use template to add another sideways motion stitch: position
template on fabric once more, mark starting point again,
select sideways motion stitch, place presser foot as shown on
template and stitch
TIP
Automatic Thread Cutter
Since threads are secured automatically when
sewing sideways motion stitches, it is particularly
convenient after stitching to cut off threads directly
using the Automatic Thread Cutter function.
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
91
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 92
Sideways Motion Stitches
Automatic Connection With 16 Directional Sewing
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Sideways motion stitches
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Automatic Connection of Sideways Motion Stitches With
16 Directional Sewing
• sideways motion stitches can be connected automatically
using the 16 Directional Sewing in Combi Mode
Using Templates to Define Spacing
™ place template of first sideways motion stitch
(e.g. No. 205) on fabric
™ mark start and end point of first stitch
™ place second stitch using the 16 Directional
Sewing template (same sewing direction as first
stitch)
• the presser foot icon, which shows in the sewing
direction, is placed on the end point of the first
stitch
• start point of second stitch must be placed on
one of the 16 sewing directions and one of the
spacing points (point of arrow)
™ note direction to start point of next stitch (e.g.
No. 205) and count number of spaces
in-between (9mm each)
Programming Sideways Motion Stitches and Spaces
™ select desired sideways motion stitch (e.g. No. 205) in Combi
Mode
™ select «16 Directional Sewing»
™ select Straight stitch No. 39, default setting with stitch
length 1 (sews only every 3rd stitch = 3mm)
™ using the arrow on-screen buttons, enter direction as noted
before
™ activate Long Stitch function (sews only every 9th stitch)
• 1 Straight stitch No. 39 (stitch length 1) in combination with
Long Stitch function gives a 9mm space
™ enter number of straight stitches (= connecting stitches)
according to spaces counted
™ remember to delete Long Stitch function!
™ select second sideways motion stitch
™ to sew a single repeat activate Pattern End 1-9x function
(«1» appears)
92
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 93
Sewing the Stitch Combination
™ place sideways motion presser foot on fabric as
shown on template so that needle will go
through starting point of stitch
• the sewing computer will stitch the first stitch
first, then switch automatically to connecting
stitches, and stop automatically at the end of the
second stitch
™ since the sideways motion stitches are secured
automatically, the connecting stitches can be cut
away when the stitching is completed
Correcting a Combination
Inserting Stitches
• stitches are always inserted above the cursor
• to insert a stitch at the beginning of a stitch
combination, move the cursor upwards, using
the scrolling arrow
™ activate desired place by selecting the desired
stitch in the Stitch Altering Area or scroll to it
™ select new stitch
• the stitch will be inserted above the cursor
Deleting Stitches
• stitches are always deleted above the cursor
™ activate desired place by selecting desired stitch
in the Stitch Altering Area or scroll to it
™ touch «Delete»
• stitch is deleted
•
«Saving Combinations» see page 154 •••••••••
•
For more information on
Preview of Combination
see page 156 ••••••••••
TIP
Automatic Thread Cutter
Since threads are secured automatically when
sewing sideways motion stitches, it is particularly
convenient after stitching to cut off threads directly
using the Automatic Thread Cutter function.
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
93
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 94
16 Directional Sewing
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 39 / Zig-zag stitch No. 40
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
16 Directional Sewing
• sew automatically in 16 directions without
turning fabric
• for many decorative projects
• for quilting without turning the fabric
Screen Display
™ select «16 Directional Sewing» screen display
™ touch straight stitch or zig-zag
™ a presser foot symbol with the 16 sewing directions all
around it appears in the middle of the screen
™ use the right or left arrow on-screen button to change
direction one step at a time
Straight Stitch No. 39
™Straight stitch No. 39 sews only every third
stitch
• the default setting for stitch length is 1
(= 3mm) and is infinitely variable from
0 - 1 (= 0 - 3mm)
Sewing
™ select desired stitch
• adjust stitch width and length if required
™ touch arrow on-screen button to set
sewing direction
• the sewing computer will sew the selected
stitch in the selected direction displayed
™ activate Long Stitch function in addition:
the sewing computer sews every 9th stitch
(stitch length default setting 1 is 9mm)
Zig-zag Stitch No. 40
• stitch length is preprogrammed for satin
stitching and is infinitely variable from
0 - 1mm
• stitch width is adjustable from 0 - 9mm
94
Changing Direction
™ stop the sewing computer when the
desired length has been stitched
™ touch arrow on-screen button to change
sewing direction
™ stitch
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 95
Connecting Stitches
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch No. 39
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
16 Directional Straight Stitches as Connecting Stitches
• particularly suitable for scattering motifs over large areas
• connecting individual motifs, sideways motion stitches, or
monogrammed letters
• connecting threads are removed after sewing
Straight Stitch With Long Stitch Function
• straight stitch with stitch length 1 default setting sews only every
third stitch (= 3mm)
™ if Long Stitch function added, the sewing computer will sew every
9th stitch (= 9mm)
• stitch length is infinitely variable
Sewing and Freely Combining
™ select decorative stitch and sew
once (first touch Pattern Repeat
1-9x function once)
™ select Straight stitch No. 39
™ use the arrow on-screen buttons to
determine sewing direction
™ touch Long Stitch function
™ sew connecting stitches (sewing
computer will sew the selected
long straight stitch in the direction
shown)
™ touch «Pattern End» button on
head frame
• sewing computer stops
automatically once the stitch has
been completed
™ do not forget to delete Long Stitch
function!
Creating a Combination in Combi
Mode
• instead of freely connecting stitches,
the stitches may be programmed with
the connecting stitches in Combi
Mode
• the programming of connected
stitches is the same as for connecting
sideways motion stitches or
monogrammed letters
™ select decorative stitch and sew
once (first touch «Pattern Repeat
1-9x» once)
™ select straight stitch, determine
new sewing direction using the
arrow on-screen buttons, reactivate
Long Stitch function, and sew
connecting stitches again, etc.
Note:
Activate Securing function to secure
motifs at beginning and end. This will
ensure that the motif stays in place once
the connecting threads are clipped.
•
•
•
more information on:
Connecting Sideways Motion Stitches on page 92
Connecting Monogrammed Letters on page 105
Saving Combinations on page 154 •••••••••••••
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
95
s073-96_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 96
4 Directional Sewing
Stitch Nos. 41 - 48
size and type suitable for the
fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
4 Sewing directions
• 4 directional automatic sewing
without turning fabric
• sewing decorative squares
• appliquéing squares
• sewing patches on garments,
especially on pants legs, sleeves, etc.
Screen Display
™ select «4 Directional Sewing» screen display
• 8 different stitches are available to you:
No. 41 Straight stitch
No. 42 Zig-zag stitch
No. 43 Jersey stitch
No. 44 Running stitch
No. 45 Double overlock
No. 46 Paris stitch
No. 47 Super stretch
No. 48 Honeycomb
•
•
•
a presser foot symbol with the 4 sewing directions arranged
around it appears in the middle of the screen
use the right or left arrow on-screen button to change direction
one step at a time
stitch length can only be altered for forward and reverse stitching
Preparation
™ place square on fabric, pin and baste if required
™ first place double-sided fusible stabilizer under square, then press
onto fabric
• for more information on preparation with double-sided fusible stabilizer
see «Preparation of Appliqué» on page 143 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Sewing on a Square
™ select desired stitch
• it is easiest to sew the square on clockwise
™ sew one side with the needle swing stitching alternately into the
square and just off the square into the fabric
™ touch arrow on-screen buttons to change sewing direction
™ sew next side, etc.
96
Decorative stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 97
Alphabet Summary
98
Important Lettering
Information
99
Combining Lettering (9mm) 100
General Monogramming
Information (Sideways Motion) 103
Monogram Size 1 104
Monogram Sizes 2 and 3 107
Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 98
Alphabet Summary
Alphabets
™ press Alphabet button
Summary
Alphabet Summary
• Alphabet summary appears
Block
Double Block
Script (Italics)
Monograms 30/20/15mm
(sideways motion)
•
98
for more information on Full Stitch Summary
see page 264 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Lettering – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 99
Important Lettering Information
Lettering – Alphabets, Numbers, Punctuation Marks
•
•
•
4 different alphabets are available
each of the alphabets can be sewn in two
different sizes as well as in lower case (apart
from the monograms)
the monogram letters alphabet is available in
three different sizes
Application
• for names, monograms and addresses
• for words and texts
• for labeling quilts (quilt labels)
Selecting Alphabets
™ press Alphabet button
• Alphabet folders appear on screen:
• Block (9mm)
• Double Block (9mm)
• Script (Italics) (9mm)
• Monograms 30/20/15mm
(sideways motion)
™ touch one of the buttons to select
• desired alphabet is activated
On-screen Letter Selection
• scroll up and down to view all capital letters, numbers,
punctuation marks and special characters
™ touching the «A/a» on-screen button changes to lower case
Perfect Stitch Formation
™ use the same color for upper and bobbin threads
™ use stabilizer on the wrong side to reinforce sewing project
™ use additional water soluble stabilizer on the right size on pile
and long fiber fabric (e. g. wool, velvet, etc.)
™ use simpler letters, programmed with straight stitches (like
Double Block lettering), on lightweight fabrics, and satin stitch
programmed lettering (like monograms) on heavyweight
fabrics for decorative accents
Lettering – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
99
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 100
Combining Lettering (9mm)
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Letters 9mm
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Letters 9mm
™ individual letters and rows of the same letter of
the same alphabet are sewn in Single Mode
™ letters for names, addresses, words, etc. are
combined and sewn in Combi Mode
Applications
Letters in Combi Mode
Combining Letters
™ open Combi Mode
™ select desired letter
• letter appears in Stitch Altering Area and on bar
above Alphabet menu
• cursor is below the letter
Further Programming
™ select next letter and touch required button
• second letter appears in Stitch Altering Area, etc.
•
100
For more information on Preview of Combination
see page 156 •••••••••••••••••••••••••
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 101
Combining Lettering and Functions
Change Size
™ select function before programming the lettering
™ touch Alphabet Size button: the field with number «2» is blue
• the letter size is reduced to 6mm
™ touch «Alphabet Size» again to reactivate the larger size
(field with number «1» is blue)
Select Lower Case
™ select function before programming the lettering
™ touch Lower Case/Upper Case button
• the field is blue, meaning that Lower Case is active
™ touch Lower Case/Upper Case button again
• Upper Case is reactivated
Mirroring Lettering
™ touch «Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)»
• the stitch is mirrored horizontally
• for special effects «Vertical Mirror Image» can be selected
•
for more information on Mirror Combination left/right
see page 158 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Using Pattern Extend to Stretch Lettering
™ touch «Pattern Extend» one time
• selected stitch or pattern is stretched by 2 times its
original size
Sample of Combination of Lettering and Functions
™ open «Combi Mode»
™ select Script, and touch capital B
• capital B is displayed in Stitch Altering Area
™ select Lower Case function
™ select the letters e, r, n, i, n, and a in lower case and in that order
• «Bernina» is displayed in Stitch Altering Area
Pattern Combination as Single or Multiple Repeat
™ create pattern combination
™ touch «Pattern Repeat 1-9x» button one or more times
(numbers 1-9 appear)
• sewing computer stops automatically after completing
selected number of patterns
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
101
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 102
Combination Sub-divider
• Combination Sub-divider is used to stitch a text, e.g.
an address, in subsequent lines instead of in one
continuous line
™ insert «Combination Sub-divider» at the desired places
™ stitch, the sewing computer stops automatically at the
end of the first combination part
™ place fabric again
™ continue to stitch, the sewing computer stops
automatically at the end of the second combination
part
™ repeat as often as required
Note:
For accurate placement of the
lettering in equally spaced lines,
draw a guide line on the fabric.
For centered texts, sew it out first
to measure it, then draw the
guide lines.
Correcting Combinations
Inserting Letters
• a letter is always inserted above the cursor
• cursor must be scrolled up (arrow) to insert an additional
letter at the beginning of lettering
™ activate desired place by selecting required letter in Stitch
Altering Area or scroll to it
™ select new letter
• letter is inserted above cursor
Deleting Letters
™ a letter is always deleted above the cursor
™ activate desired place by selecting required letter in Stitch
Altering Area, or scroll to it
™ touch «Delete»
• letter is deleted
•
«Saving Combinations» see page 154 ••••••••
TIP
Adding Securing function (4 small
securing stitches)
There are different ways to automatically secure
stitching:
1. touch function button before starting to sew
to secure stitching at the beginning
2. touch function button after completing the
stitching to secure it at the end
3. program function within a combination to
secure accordingly
102
TIP
Using specialty needles (e. g. double
needle)
™ after inserting specialty needle, activate
corresponding double needle in Security Program
• stitch width is automatically limited according to
the needle selected
• stitch width can also be limited manually when
using «normal» needles to reduce lettering size
accordingly
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 103
General Monogramming Information
Sideways Motion
Monograms (sideways motion)
• sideways motion stitches are large stitches or patterns which
are sewn with the fabric being fed sideways, as well as
forward and backward
• monograms (sideways motion) are represented by 4 arrows
top left in the Stitch Altering Area
• start (green point) and end (red cross) are visible in the Stitch
Altering Area
Monogram Sizes
• lettering size 1 is 30mm
• when starting the monogramming program, lettering
size 1 is normally activated
• monograms in size 1 are individual letters, which
means that the sewing computer secures and stops
after each letter
• the templates included with the owner's manual
contain size 1 monograms
• lettering size 2 is 20mm
™ touch Alphabet Size button: the field with number
«2» is blue
• size 2 monograms are sewn in a continuous
horizontal row on the fabric
• lettering size 3 is 15mm
™ touch Alphabet Size button: the field with number
«3» is blue
• size 3 monograms are sewn in a continuous
horizontal row on the fabric
Note:
Size 1 monograms are dealt with
differently than sizes 2 and 3.
See pages 104-106 (size 1) 107-108
(size 2 and 3).
Sewing Sideways Motion Stitches
™ use slide-on table to enlarge sewing area
™ when sewing, ensure that fabric feeds smoothly and
easily, without bumping into anything or dragging
™ it is important to let the sewing computer do the
stitching freely; do not pull, push, or hold the fabric
back
Balance
• depending on type of fabric, stabilizer and thread
quality, the stitched patterns may differ slightly from
the original
• use the Balance function to match the selected stitch
to the fabric used
TIP
Test sewing
It is always a good idea to test sew
with the materials you intend to use –
fabric, stabilizer, and threads.
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
103
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 104
Size 1 Monograms
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Size 1 monograms
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Size 1 Monograms
• size 1 monograms are individual letters, which
means that the sewing computer secures and
stops
™ templates are used to position monograms
™ monograms can be positioned and combined
manually, using templates, or connected
automatically with the 16 sewing directions
Templates as Sewing Help
• the templates included with the owner’s manual are helpful
when positioning patterns on the fabric
• all size 1 monograms are printed in their original size on the
templates
• the starting point of the individual pattern is marked with a
green circle, the end with a red cross. The beginning and end
are also provided with a hole (for accurate transfer and marking on the fabric)
• the sewing direction is shown with the presser foot symbol
and thin guiding lines
• the presser foot must always run parallel to the guiding lines
when sewing
Combining Monogram Letters Manually With Templates
Combining Monogram Letters With Templates
™ using the template, position letter at desired place on fabric
™ transfer starting point (circle) of letter to fabric
Sewing
™ select letter in Single Mode
™ place sideways motion presser foot on the fabric as shown on
the template so that needle will go through starting point on
letter
™ stitch letter
104
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 105
Adding Letter Using the Template
™ use template to add letter on fabric.
Again: mark starting point, select letter,
place presser foot as shown on template,
and stitch letter
Connecting Monogram Combinations Automatically With 16 Directional Sewing
Instead of combining monogram letters manually, they can be combined automatically using the
template and the 16 Directional Sewing function.
Determining Spacings Using Templates
™ place template with first letter of monogram (e. g. «F») on
fabric
™ mark start and end point of letter
™ using the 16 directional sewing template, place second letter
of monogram (same sewing direction as first pattern (letter)
• the foot icon, pointing in the sewing direction, is placed on
the end point of the first pattern
™ the start point of the second letter (e. g. «G») must be placed
on one of the 16 directions and a spacing mark (arrow point)
™ read the direction to the start point of the next sideways
motion stitches (letter), and count the number of spaces
(9mm each)
Programming Monograms and Spaces
™ select desired letter in Combi Mode (e. g. «F»)
™ select 16 Directional Sewing in Decorative Stitches Category
™ select Straight stitch No. 39 with stitch length basic setting 1
(sews only every 3rd stitch, and is 3mm)
™ enter desired direction
™ activate Long Stitch function (sews only every 9th stitch)
• one Straight stitch No. 39 (stitch length 1) in combination
with the Long Stitch function leads to a spacing of 9mm
length
™ program the number of required straight stitches (connecting
stitches) according to the counted spacings
™ Do not forget to delete the Long Stitch function!
™ select second letter (e. g. «G»)
™ to sew a single repeat activate «Pattern Repeat 1-9x»
(number «1» appears)
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
105
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 106
Sewing Monograms
™ place sideways motion presser foot on the fabric as shown on the
template so that needle will go through starting point on letter
• sewing computer will first stitch first letter («F»), sews automatically
the connecting stitches, and stops automatically at end of second
letter («G»)
• since the monogrammed letters are secured automatically, the
connecting stitches can be cut away after completing the stitching
Correcting Combinations
Inserting Stitches
• a stitch is always inserted above the cursor
• to insert a stitch at the beginning of a stitch combination,
move the cursor up, using the scrolling arrow
™ activate desired place by selecting the required stitch in the
Stitch Altering Area or scroll to it
™ select new stitch
™ the stitch will be inserted above the cursor
Deleting Stitches
• stitches are always deleted above the cursor
™ activate desired place by selecting required stitch in the Stitch
Altering Area or scroll to it
™ touch «Delete»
• stitch is deleted
•
For more information on Preview of
Combination see page 156 ••••••••
•
«Saving Combinations» see page 154 ••••••••
TIP
Automatic Thread Cutter
Since threads are secured automatically when sewing sideways
motion stitches, it is particularly convenient after stitching to cut
off threads directly using the Automatic Thread Cutter function.
106
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 107
Size
2 and 3 Monograms
Monogrammgrössen
2 und 3
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Size 2 and 3 monograms
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Sideways motion foot No. 40C
Size 2 and 3 Monograms
• size 2 and 3 monograms are sewn in a continuous
horizontal line
• size 2 and 3 monograms are dealt with similarly
to 9mm lettering
Size 2 and 3 Monograms in Combi Mode
Combining Size 2 and 3 Monograms
™ open Combi Mode
™ select desired letter
• letter appears in Stitch Altering Area
• cursor is behind the letter
Further Programming
™ select next letter, and touch corresponding button
• second letter appears in Stitch Altering Area, etc.
•
for more information on Preview of Combination
see page 156 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
107
s097-108_e
19.4.2004
16:22 Uhr
Seite 108
Combining Size 2 and 3 Monograms and Functions
Combining Lettering and Functions – An Example
™ open Combi Mode
™ touch letter «B»
• letter «B» appears in Stitch Altering Area
™ select size 2 monograms
™ touch letter «E»
™ select size 3 monograms
™ select the letters R, N, I, N, A in that order
• the Stitch Altering Area now displays the word
«BERNINA»
Pattern Combination in Single or Multiple Repeat
™ touch Pattern Repeat 1–9x button one or more times
(numbers 1–9 appear) after creating a combination
• the sewing computer stops automatically on completion
of the entered number of combinations
Correcting Combinations
Inserting Stitches
• a stitch is always inserted above the cursor
• to insert a stitch at the beginning of a stitch combination,
move the cursor up, using the scrolling arrow
™ activate desired place by selecting the required stitch in the
Stitch Altering Area or scroll to it
™ select new stitch
• the stitch will be inserted above the cursor
Deleting Stitches
• stitches are always deleted above the cursor
™ activate desired place by selecting required stitch in the
Stitch Altering Area or scroll to it
™ touch «Delete»
• stitch is deleted
108
•
«Saving Combinations» see page 154 •••••••••••
•
for more information on Preview of Combination
see page 156 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Lettering – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 109
Buttonhole Summary 110
Buttonhole Functions 111
Important Information 112
Corded Buttonholes 114
Automatic Buttonhole 116
• all types with Direct Entry Length
• Standard and stretch with length
calculated from button
Buttonhole in Long Term
Memory 118
Automatic Buttonholes
(Standard and Stretch) 119
• without stitch counter buttonhole
Automatic Round, Keyhole and
Hand-look Buttonholes 121
• without stitch counter buttonhole
Stitch Counter Buttonhole 123
Manual 4 or 6 Step Buttonhole 125
• all types of buttonholes
• Round and keyhole buttonhole
Straight Stitch Buttonhole 127
Bound Buttonhole 129
Decorative Buttonholes 131
Button Sew-on Program 132
Eyelets 133
Buttonholes
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 110
Stitch Summary
Summary
Application of Buttonholes
Standard Buttonhole
Light- to mediumweight fabrics. Blouses,
dresses, bedding, etc.
Narrow buttonhole (heirloom sewing)
Light- to mediumweight fabrics. Blouses,
dresses, children’s and baby clothes, dolls’
clothes, crafts
Stretch buttonhole
All stretch fabrics made from cotton, wool,
silk and synthetic fibers
Hand-look buttonhole
Light- to mediumweight woven fabrics.
Blouses, dresses, leisure wear, bedding
Straight stitch buttonhole
For reinforcing buttonholes, pocket edges,
especially for stitching buttonholes in
leather or imitation suede
Round buttonhole with normal bartack
For medium- to heavyweight fabrics of all
types. Clothing, jackets, coats, rainwear
Button sew-on program
For buttons with 2 and 4 holes
Round buttonhole with horizontal bartack
For medium- to heavyweight fabrics of all
types. Clothing, jackets, coats, rainwear
Narrow zig-zag eyelet
Opening for cords and narrow
ribbons/bands, decorative work
Keyhole buttonhole with normal bartack
Heavyweight non-stretch fabrics. Jackets,
coats, leisure wear
Straight stitch eyelet
Opening for cords and narrow
ribbons/bands, decorative work
Keyhole buttonhole with pointed bartack
Heavyweight non-stretch fabrics. Jackets,
coats, leisure wear
110
Keyhole buttonhole with horizontal
bartack
For firm non-stretch fabrics. Jackets, coats,
leisure wear
Buttonholes – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 111
In General
Buttonholes are practical closures which can also
be used for a decorative effect. The artista 200
provides a very versatile selection.
All buttonholes can be sewn and programmed
in a variety of ways.
Buttonholes/Button Sew-on Program/Eyelets
™ press Buttonhole button
• a summary of the different buttonholes
and eyelets appears on the screen display
Select Buttonhole/Buttonhole Sew-on
Program/Eyelet
™ touch desired stitch
• the selected buttonhole, eyelet or button sew-on
program is activated
• if one of the stitches (51-63) is activated, all
functions that can be used are on the function
toolbar
•
for more information on Application see pages
116-133 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Buttonhole Program Functions
The functions below appear on the function toolbar at the lower edge of the screen display when any
buttonhole (51-59 + 63) is selected.
Programming Buttonhole Length
• the symbol is automatically highlighted in
blue (active) when a buttonhole is selected
• using the Quick Reverse button on head
frame a buttonhole length can be
determined directly
• when the buttonhole is programmed the
symbol is turned off (inactive, yellow)
• if a new length is to be programmed the
symbol has to be reselected
Buttonhole Length – Direct Entry Length
(in mm) or On-screen Button
Measurement
™ touch symbol to open special screen display
™ enter the buttonhole length (stitch length in
mm) directly with the stitch length or stitch
width knob
™ to measure hold button to bottom lower left
corner of screen
™ the buttonhole length is obtained by
adjusting blue circle to button size (with
stitch length or stitch width knob)
• 2mm for the button thickness will be added
automatically (with on-screen button
measurement only)
Application:
• simple method to determine buttonhole size
by direct entry of the length in mm or by
measuring button on the screen
Manual Buttonhole
™ touch symbol to open special screen
display
™ sew manual buttonhole in 4 or 6
steps (according to buttonhole type)
Application:
• for individual manually sewn
buttonholes
• to repair existing buttonholes
Stitch Counter Buttonhole
™ select buttonhole
™ touch symbol
• the stitch counter buttonhole is
activated
™ when the desired length is reached
(first buttonhole bead), press the
external Quick Reverse button
• after length of second bead is
determined by pressing the Quick
Reverse button, the screen display
changes to «auto Stitch Counter»
• the selected buttonhole is
programmed
Buttonholes – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
111
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 112
Important Buttonhole Information
Marking Buttonholes
Manual Buttonholes
• Buttonhole foot No. 3C
™ the buttonhole length of manually stitched
buttonholes must be marked on the fabric in
the appropriate position
Automatic Buttonholes
• Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
™ mark the length of the first buttonhole
• after sewing the first buttonhole, the length for
all subsequent buttonholes is automatically
programmed
™ mark the starting point of all subsequent
buttonholes
• the buttonhole length indicates the buttonhole
opening in mm
Correct Stabilizers for Buttonholes
2
1
Automatic Buttonholes
™ always use a stabilizer (1) so that the buttonholes turn out well
• the stabilizer should suit the fabric type
™ for thick and fluffy fabrics an embroidery stabilizer can be used (2). The fabric feeds better.
Sewing Buttonholes
Test Sewing
™ always sew a test on the fabric(s) you
will use with the same interlining and
stabilizers
™ select the same buttonhole type
™ sew all buttonholes in the same direction
on the fabric (with or against the grain)
112
Buttonholes – Important Information
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Corrections
• to adjust the bead width, alter the
stitch width
• to adjust the density of the beads,
alter the stitch length
• any alterations to the stitch length
with automatic and manual
buttonholes affect both beads
(making them more or less dense)
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 113
Thread Tension
•
•
•
the tension is set automatically when a buttonhole is selected
the upper tension is slightly looser than normal
this gives a slightly rounded appearance to the beads, making the buttonhole more attractive
Balance for Buttonholes
Balance for Direct Entry Length Standard Buttonhole
• any Balance alterations affect both beads
Note:
With Direct Entry Length and Manual buttonholes each individual buttonhole sequence can
be balanced separately.
With the Stitch Counter buttonholes any Balance alteration affects both beads differently
(left and right): by adjusting the beads the keyhole or eye will be altered as well.
A
A
B
B
Balance for Direct Entry Length Keyhole or Round Buttonholes
• any Balance alterations affect both beads
• the keyhole or eye is balanced as follows:
™ 1. sew straight stitches until the sewing computer changes to the keyhole
or eye, then stop the sewing computer
™ 2. touch «Balance» and now adjust the picture in the right portion of the
Balance screen with the stitch length knob to suit the sewn buttonhole
• if keyhole is distorted to the right (picture A)
™ turn stitch length knob counter clockwise
• if keyhole is distorted to the left (picture B)
™ turn stitch length knob clockwise
™ 3. touch «OK» and complete buttonhole
Balance for Stitch Counter Buttonhole
• any Balance alterations affect both beads differently:
• if left bead is too dense (picture A)
™ turn stitch length knob counter clockwise - left bead will be longer,
right bead will be shorter
• if left bead not dense enough (picture B)
™ turn stitch length knob clockwise - left bead will be shorter, right bead
will be longer
™ reprogram buttonhole after each Balance alteration
™ after any Balance changes are made, reprogram the buttonhole
Balance for Manual Standard Buttonhole
• any Balance alterations affect both beads
Balance for Manual Round or Keyhole Buttonhole
• any Balance alterations affect both beads differently (see picture for stitch
counter buttonhole)
• the keyhole or eye is balanced as follows:
• if keyhole is distorted to the left (picture B)
™ turn stitch length knob counter clockwise
• if keyhole is distorted to the right (picture A)
™ turn stitch length knob clockwise
Recommendation
™ sew a test on the fabric(s) you will use
Clear Balance
™ touch «Reset» in the special Balance screen or press external «clr» button
(«clr» deletes the programmed buttonhole as well!)
Buttonholes – Important Information
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
113
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 114
Corded Buttonholes
Cords
• gimp cord reinforces buttonholes and enhances
their appearance
• the loop of the cord should be at the end of the
buttonhole most subject to wear
• position the work accordingly under the presser
foot
• gimp cord is particularly recommended for
standard and stretch buttonholes
Suitable Cords:
• Perle cotton No. 8
• strong hand-sewing thread
• fine crochet yarn
Attaching the Cord Onto Presser Foot No. 3C
™ insert the needle at the beginning of the buttonhole
™ raise the presser foot
™ hook the cord over the center toe of the foot
™ place both ends of the cord in the grooves on the
sole of the foot and pull them to the back
™ lower the presser foot
Sewing
™ sew the buttonhole in the usual manner, do not
hold the cord tightly
™ the buttonhole will form over the cord, covering it
Securing the Cord
™ pull the cord through the buttonhole until the loop
disappears into the end
™ pull the ends of the cord through to wrong side of
the fabric, knot or secure with stitches
TIP
With presser foot No. 3C also round and keyhole
buttonholes can be reinforced with cord.
114
Buttonholes – Important Information
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
3A
Seite 115
Attaching Cord in Automatic Buttonhole Foot No. 3A
™ insert the needle at the beginning of the buttonhole
™ raise the presser foot
™ guide the cord under the foot to the right
™ hook the cord over the pin at the back of the foot
™ bring the cords to the front of the foot
™ pull each end into one of the notches at the front of the foot
Sewing
™ sew the buttonhole in the usual manner
™ do not hold the cord
™ the buttonhole will form over the cord, covering it
Securing Cord
™ pull the cord through the buttonhole until the loop disappears
into the end of it
™ pull the ends of the cord through to wrong side of the fabric,
knot or secure with stitches
Cutting Buttonholes Open
™ using the seam ripper or buttonhole cutter and block, cut from
both ends towards the middle
™ in order not to cut the ends of short buttonholes by mistake,
place a pin at the end of the buttonhole for additional security
Buttonhole Cutter and Block (optional accessory)
™ place the fabric on a piece of wood
™ place the cutter in the center of the buttonhole
™ press the handle of the cutter (either by hand or with a hammer)
to open the buttonhole
Sewing Buttonhole Diagonal to Edge
Height Compensating Plates for Buttonholes (optional accessory)
• when sewing a buttonhole using Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A on an
uneven area (such as over a seam allowance), use the height compensating
plates for buttonholes
™ place the plates from the back between fabric and slide foot bottom up to
the thick part of the fabric and push to front
• this accessory will create a smooth surface for the foot and help make a
perfect buttonhole
Buttonholes – Important Information
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
115
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 116
Automatic Buttonhole (All Types)
Direct Entry Length
•
•
enter the buttonhole length (buttonhole opening in mm)
directly with the stitch length or stitch width knob
suitable for all buttonhole lengths of 4mm up to the maximum
length
Entering Buttonhole Length
• buttonholes can be sewn to a specific length with
the Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
™ select type of buttonhole
™ touch the Direct Entry Length function
Applications
Determining Buttonhole Length
• a special screen display appears
™ enter buttonhole length with the stitch width or
stitch length knob
• the programmed length is shown between the two
arrows
™ confirm the desired length with «OK», the screen
changes automatically
• «auto» and the programmed length in mm appear
on the screen
• the buttonhole length indicates the buttonhole
opening in mm
Corrections
™ enter new length as described above
Back to Buttonhole Menu
™ touch «ESC» to return to Buttonhole screen
Deleting Saved Buttonholes
™ press external «clr» button or touch «recording»
• «auto» disappears and «recording» appears
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
116
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 117
Automatic Buttonhole (Standard and Stretch)
Button Measuring on Screen
The buttonhole size can be determined by holding a button on the screen.
The length will be determined by the stitch width or stitch length knob.
Opening Button Measurement
™ select buttonhole
™ touch the «Direct Entry Length» function
Determining Button Size
• a special screen appears
™ hold the button against the bottom left corner of the screen
™ use the external stitch width or stitch length knob to adjust
the colored circle to fit around the button
• the button size is shown in mm between the two arrows
(e.g. 16mm)
• confirm the correct size with «OK», the screen changes
automatically
Back to Buttonhole Menu
™ touch «ESC» to confirm and return to Buttonhole screen,
the original settings remain
Buttonhole Size
• the sewing computer calculates the buttonhole size from the
button diameter
• 2mm are added automatically to take the thickness of the
button into account
Corrections for Thick Buttons
™ for buttons which are particularly thick, e.g. raised buttons,
etc. make the colored circle 1 – 4mm larger than the button
held on the screen
Test Buttonhole
™ sew a test buttonhole on a scrap of the fabric and interfacing
™ cut buttonhole open
™ push button through hole
™ correct the size if necessary
Deleting Saved Buttonholes
™ press external «clr» button or touch «recording»
• «auto» disappears and «recording» appears
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
117
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:24 Uhr
Seite 118
Buttonhole in Long Term Memory
Long term saving of buttonhole programs is only
possible for buttonholes originally stitched as
«auto» length buttonholes.
Saving Buttonhole (Save)
™ touch the displayed buttonhole in the Stitch Altering Area
(left portion of screen)
• an additional message appears
™ touch the Save function and the buttonhole is saved in the
long term Memory
•
for more information on programming the desired Automatic
Buttonhole see pages 116-117 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Recalling Saved Buttonhole
™ select the desired buttonhole type
• the buttonhole length appears on the Direct Entry Length
on-screen button
™ touch the Direct Entry Length function and confirm the saved
length on the screen that appears with «OK»
• «auto» and the length in mm appear on the screen
Changing Saved Buttonhole
™ select the desired buttonhole type
™ touch the Direct Entry Length function
• change the length of the saved buttonhole on the screen that
appears and confirm with «OK»
™ save buttonhole as described above
• programming a new length overrides the existing saved one
Deleting Saved Buttonhole
™ select the desired buttonhole type
™ touch the Direct Entry Length function and program a new
length or touch the displayed buttonhole in the Stitch
Altering Area
• an additional message appears
™ touch «Reset» and the saved buttonhole is deleted
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
118
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 119
Automatic Buttonholes (Standard and Stretch)
Without Stitch Counter Buttonhole
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Standard and Stretch buttonholes No. 51,
52 and 53
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
Automatic Buttonhole
• the lens on the Automatic buttonhole foot
No. 3A automatically registers the length of the
buttonhole
• suitable for all buttonhole lengths of 4mm
up to the maximum length, which can be set
with stitch width or stitch length knob
Note:
Both beads are sewn in the same direction.
The buttonhole length indicates the buttonhole
opening in mm.
Sewing Standard and Stretch Buttonholes
Sewing First Bead
• the stitching sequence is displayed in the Stitch
Altering Area
™ sew the first bead forwards, stopping at the
required length
Programming Buttonhole
™ press the Quick Reverse button on head frame
• «auto» and the programmed length (in mm)
appear on the screen to indicate that the
buttonhole length is programmed
Auto Buttonhole
the sewing computer sews the following
automatically:
• straight stitches in reverse
• the first bartack
• the second bead forwards
• the second bartack
• the securing stitches. The sewing computer stops
and automatically changes to the
beginning of the buttonhole
All subsequent buttonholes will be sewn
automatically to the same length (without pressing
the Quick Reverse button)
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
119
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 120
Important: How to Correct Mistakes
™ touch the Pattern Begin function
• the sewing computer reverts to the beginning of
the buttonhole
Deleting Saved Buttonholes
™ press external «clr» button or touch «recording»
• «auto» disappears and «recording» appears
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
TIP
Exact duplicates
The «auto» function ensures that each buttonhole
will be exactly the same length as the previous one.
Marking
Due to the «auto» function only the beginning of the
buttonholes have to be marked – a real time saver.
TIP
Beautiful buttonholes
Keep the speed consistent for each buttonhole
(reduce speed with Motor Speed function if necessary).
This results in equal density of the buttonhole beads.
120
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 121
Automatic Round, Keyhole and Hand-look Buttonholes
Without Stitch Counter Buttonhole
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Round and Hand-look buttonholes No. 54 +
55 + 63 and Keyhole buttonholes No. 56–58
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
Automatic Buttonhole
• the lens on the Automatic buttonhole foot
No. 3A automatically registers the length of the
buttonhole (for exact duplication) and
automatically completes the buttonhole, when
reaching the maximum length
Note:
Both beads are sewn in the same direction.
The buttonhole length indicates the
buttonhole opening in mm.
Sewing Round and Keyhole Buttonholes
Sewing Straight Stitches
• the stitching sequence is displayed in the Stitch Altering Area
™ sew straight stitches forwards, stopping at the desired length
Programming Buttonhole
™ press the Quick Reverse button on head frame
• «auto» and the programmed length (in mm) appear on the
screen to indicate that the buttonhole length is programmed
Auto Buttonhole
the sewing computer sews the following automatically:
• the eye or the keyhole
• the first bead in reverse
• straight stitches forwards
• the second bead in reverse
• the bartack
• the securing stitches. The sewing computer stops and changes
automatically to the beginning of the buttonhole
All subsequent buttonholes will be sewn automatically to the
same length (without pressing the Quick Reverse button)
Important: How to Correct Mistakes
™ touch the Pattern Begin function
• the sewing computer reverts to the beginning of the
buttonhole
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
121
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 122
Sewing Hand-look Buttonhole
™ sew with consistent speed
Length of the First Bead
™ sew bead to desired length
™ stop sewing computer
Programming the Buttonhole
™ press Quick Reverse button on head frame
• «auto» and the programmed length (in mm) appear on the
screen to indicate that the buttonhole length is programmed
Auto Buttonhole
the sewing computer sews the following automatically:
• the eye
• the second bead in reverse
• the top bartack, the securing stitches and stops automatically
All subsequent buttonholes will be sewn automatically to the
same length (without pressing the Quick Reverse button)
Deleting Saved Buttonholes
™ press external «clr» button or touch «recording»
• «auto» disappears and «recording» appears
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
TIP
Double sewn keyhole buttonholes
• keyhole buttonholes can be sewn twice on thick
fabrics and the stitches are made longer when
sewing the first time (without keyhole and pointed
bartack)
™ after sewing the first buttonhole, do not move the
work, simply tap the foot control once to begin
sewing again
TIP
Beautiful buttonholes
™ for successful sewing of buttonholes always use
a suitable stabilizer or interfacing
• using a gimp cord enhances the appearance of
the buttonholes
122
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 123
Stitch Counter Buttonholes for All Buttonhole Types
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Buttonholes (all types)
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Buttonhole foot No. 3C or
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
Stitch Counter Buttonholes
™ select buttonhole
™
touch the Stitch Counter function,
the sewing computer recognizes the
Stitch Counter buttonhole program
• the length of the buttonhole is now determined
by the Stitch Counter
Note:
The first bead (left) is sewn forwards, the second
bead (right) is sewn in reverse.
The stitch counter buttonhole cannot be saved in
the long term Memory.
Sewing Stitch Counter Buttonhole
™ sew with consistent speed
Length of First Bead
™ sew the first bead the desired length
™ stop the sewing computer
™ press Quick Reverse button on head frame
Bartack, Second Bead in Reverse
™ bottom bartack and second bead are sewn in reverse
™ stop sewing computer at the first stitch
™ press Quick Reverse button on head frame
Bartack, Securing Stitches
• the sewing computer sews the top bartack, securing stitches
and stops automatically
• «auto» and «Stitch Counter» appear on the screen
• the buttonhole is saved
• each subsequent buttonhole will be sewn identically
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
123
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 124
Deleting Saved Buttonholes
™ press external «clr» button or touch «recording»
• «auto» disappears and «recording» appears
• a new buttonhole length can be programmed
Corrections
™ reprogram the buttonhole if any alterations to the
stitch width, length or Balance have been made
Note:
Programmed buttonhole on a different fabric:
• different fabrics and interfacings can affect
the look of a stitch counter buttonhole
• if you are using a different fabric, program
the buttonhole again
• it is recommended to sew a test on the
fabric(s) you will use
TIP
More buttonholes with presser foot No. 3C
Ideal for buttonholes where the Automatic
buttonhole foot No. 3A cannot be used.
TIP
Beautiful buttonholes
• always keep the speed consistent for beads of
equal density
• sew at a moderate speed for best results (reduce
speed with Motor Speed function if necessary)
TIP
Marking
Due to the «auto» function only the beginning of the
buttonholes have to be marked – a real time saver.
124
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 125
Manual 4 or 6 Step Buttonholes
(All Types)
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
any Buttonhole
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Buttonhole foot No. 3C
Note:
Sewing buttonholes manually is ideal if you only need to
sew one; also for repairing existing buttonholes.
The number of steps depends on the type of buttonhole.
A manually sewn buttonhole cannot be saved.
Opening Manual Buttonhole
™ select the type of buttonhole desired
™ touch «man» for the Manual Buttonhole function
Step Symbols
• the step sequence of the selected buttonhole is
shown on the screen
• «1» is activated
• standard buttonhole has 6 steps
• round, keyhole and hand-look buttonholes have
4 steps
• the active step is shown in the center
TIP
Repairing buttonholes
• omit or bypass the unneeded steps
• use only the steps which are necessary
to repair the worn sections
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
125
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 126
Sewing 4 or 6 Step Buttonholes
Round and Keyhole Buttonholes
Sewing a 4 Step Buttonhole
• «1» is activated
™ sew the first bead
™ stop the sewing computer at the desired length
™ touch «2» on the screen
• the sewing computer sews the eye or the keyhole
™ touch «3»
• the sewing computer sews the second bead in reverse
™ stop the sewing computer at the first stitch
™ touch «4»
• the sewing computer sews the top bartack and secures stitches
automatically
• the length of the beads is determined manually when sewing
• bartack, eye and securing stitches are preprogrammed
Note:
The graphic on the screen is the
same for the round and keyhole
buttonholes.
Leave Program
™ touch «ESC»
• screen reverts to the original Buttonhole screen
Sewing a 6 Step Buttonhole
• «1» is activated
™ sew first bead
™ stop sewing computer at the desired bead length
Note :
6 bartack stitches are sewn and
the sewing computer stops
automatically.
If more than 6 bartack stitches are
to be sewn, simply tap the foot
control once to begin sewing
again.
126
™ touch «2»
• the sewing computer sews straight stitches in reverse
™ stop sewing computer at the first stitch of the first bead
™ touch «3»
• the sewing computer sews the top bartack and stops
automatically
™ touch «4»
• the sewing computer sews the second bead
™ stop sewing computer
™ touch «5»
• the sewing computer sews the bottom bead and stops
automatically
™ touch «6»
• the sewing computer secures the stitches and stops
automatically
™ the bead length is determined by the user
• the bartack and the securing stitches are preprogrammed
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 127
Straight Stitch Buttonhole
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch buttonhole No. 59
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Buttonhole foot No. 3C or
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
Automatic Program With Automatic
Buttonhole Foot No. 3A
The lens on the Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
automatically registers the length of the buttonhole
(so it can be duplicated exactly).
Note:
Straight stitched buttonholes are particularly useful for
reinforcing buttonholes on all soft and loosely woven
fabrics such as wool, or for buttonholes which are subject
to extreme wear. They are also useful for reinforcing
buttonhole openings in leather, vinyl or felt.
Straight Stitch
™ select stitch No. 59 on the screen
Altering the Distance
™ alter the stitch width if the distance between the
rows of stitching is too wide or too narrow
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
127
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 128
Sewing Straight Stitch Buttonhole
Sewing the Automatic Buttonhole Program
™ sew the first row of straight stitches forwards until the desired
length is reached
™ press the Quick Reverse button
• «auto» and the programmed length (in mm) appear which
means the length is programmed
• the sewing computer completes the buttonhole program
automatically
• all subsequent buttonholes will be stitched to the same length
(without pressing the Quick Reverse button)
• the distance between the stitched rows can be adjusted with
the stitch width
Sewing With Foot No. 3C (Stitch Counter)
™ select the Stitch Counter function for stitch counter buttonholes
• Buttonhole foot No. 3C will register the number of stitches in
the buttonhole
Sewing Stitch Counter Straight Stitch Buttonhole
™ sew the first bead, stop stitching at the desired length
™ press the Quick Reverse button on head frame
™ sew the end of the buttonhole and then the second bead in
reverse
™ stop sewing computer at the first stitch
™ press the Quick Reverse button on head frame
• the sewing computer sews the horizontal bar and securing
stitches and stops automatically
• «auto» and the programmed length (in mm) appear on the
screen
• each subsequent stitched buttonhole will be sewn to the
same length as the programmed buttonhole
TIP
Straight stitched buttonholes are also useful
for reinforcing buttonhole openings in leather,
synthetic leather, vinyl or felt.
128
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 129
Bound Buttonhole
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Straight stitch buttonhole No. 59
80 – 100 H
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Buttonhole foot No. 3C or
Automatic buttonhole foot No. 3A
For topstitching: Straight stitch foot with
sliding sole No. 53 (optional accessory)
Suitable Material for Bound Buttonholes
• synthetic leather
• leather
• Alcantara
• plastic coated fabrics
Sewing Bound Buttonhole
1. Determining Buttonhole Size
™ cut a rectangular piece of fabric 1 1/4” (3cm)
longer and 1 1/2” (4cm) wider than the
buttonhole. This will create the welts.
™ place it on the leather (right sides together) and
allow for facing if necessary
™ sew Straight stitch buttonhole No. 59 (stitch
width being 9mm)
2. Cutting Buttonhole Open
™ cut buttonhole open in the center with pointed
scissors about 5mm away from the end
™ at the corners cut diagonally to the seam –
make sure not to cut into the seam!
3. Turning Buttonhole Through
™ turn the buttonhole through to the wrong side
™ press edges outwards
TIP
Press synthetic leather or leather carefully on
medium heat and with a cloth.
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
129
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 130
4. Pressing Welts
™ press welts on the wrong side of the fabric or
baste, so that two equally big strips are formed
on the right side
5. Edgestitching
™ edgestitch the buttonhole (see picture)
™ place facing on the wrong side
6. Topstitching Buttonhole
™ topstitch buttonhole with the Straight stitch foot
with sliding sole No. 53 on the right side
(including facing)
7. Trimming Leather
™ cut leather of facing on the wrong side inside
the sewn rectangle and trim away slightly
TIP
Bound buttonhole in other materials
™ sew buttonhole as described under 1. – 7.
™ at the end, finish edges by hand and secure
130
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 131
Decorative Buttonholes
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Buttonholes (all types)
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, polyester or embroidery threads
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C (for topstitching)
Buttonhole foot No. 3A or No. 3C
Decorative Buttonholes
• suitable for all buttonholes
• for decorating buttonholes as a creative element
Sewing
Topstitched Lizard
™ copy sketched lizard onto fabric or draw with a
fine pencil, tailor’s chalk or an air or water
soluble marker (test first on fabric remnant)
™ topstitch lizard along the drawn outlines and
create the inner part with a zig-zag stitch (see
picture)
™ sew buttonhole either with foot No. 3A or 3C
Buttonhole With Decorative Stitches
™ sew buttonhole either with Buttonhole foot
No. 3A or 3C
™ embellish buttonhole with Decorative stitch
No. 107 and placket with Decorative stitch
No. 708
TIP
Buttonhole with embroidery
Create buttonhole and combine with your personal
embroidery from the artista PC software.
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
131
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 132
Button Sew-on Program
Stitch:
Stitch width:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Button sew-on program No. 60
depends on the distance between the holes
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
down (darning position)
Button sew-on foot No. 18
Note:
Buttons with 2 and 4 holes can be attached
with presser foot No. 18. The shank (thread
length between button and fabric) can be
made shorter or longer as desired. Buttons
sewn on for decorative purposes only are
stitched without a thread shank.
Button Sew-on Program
™ select stitch No. 60 on the screen
Sewing 2 Hole Button
™ select Button sew-on program No. 60 on the screen
™ check distance between holes with the handwheel and adjust
stitch width if necessary
™ hold the threads when starting to sew
™ sew on button
• the sewing computer stops automatically when program is
completed and is immediately ready for the next button
18
Sewing 4 Hole Button
™ sew the front holes first
™ carefully move the button forward
™ sew the back holes with the same program
Beginning and Ending Threads
™ the threads are secured and can be trimmed
For Secure Results
™ pull both bobbin threads until the ends of the upper thread
are visible on the wrong side (knot if required)
™ trim threads
TIPS
Sewing on buttons
A real time saver, especially when several of the same type
buttons must be sewn on, e.g. blouses, bedding, etc.
For work which is subject to heavy wear or washing, sew Button
sew-on program twice.
132
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 133
Zig-zag or Straight Stitch Eyelets
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Narrow zig-zag eyelet No. 61 or
Straight stitch eyelet No. 62
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or polyester
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Note:
Eyelets are ideal openings for cords and narrow
ribbons, attractive decorative elements, ideal for
children’s clothing, and crafts. They cannot be
programmed in stitch combinations.
Eyelet Programs
™ select desired eyelet
No. 61 = zig-zag eyelet
No. 62 = straight stitch eyelet
Sewing Eyelets
™ position fabric under the presser
foot and sew
• the sewing computer stops
automatically when finished and is
immediately ready for the next
eyelet
• sew twice for a more filled in satin
stitch eyelet
Punching Eyelets
™ use an awl or punch to cut open
the eyelet
TIP
Decorative eyelets
Ideal for eyes on soft toys, dolls or use decorative
thread to introduce an attractive element.
Buttonholes – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
133
s109-134_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 134
134
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 135
Stitch Summary 136
Important Information on
Different Techniques 137
Quilters Securing Program 138
• Stitch No. 324
Quilting Straight Stitch 139
• Stitch No. 325
Piecing Stitch/Straight Stitch 140
• Straight stitch No. 326
Hand-look Quilt Stitch 141
• Stitches No. 328, 346–350
Decorative Quilt Stitches 142
• Stitches No. 327, 332–345, 351
Satin Stitch 143
• Stitch No. 354
Blanket Stitches 145
• Stitches No. 329, 330, 352, 353
Turned-edge Appliqués 146
• Blindstitch No. 331
Freehand Quilting 148
• Stitch No. 325
Quilt Stitches
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 136
Quilt Stitches
Summary
Quilt Stitches
Different stitches can be selected which can be used especially for
quilting, patchwork or for appliqué:
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
339
346
352
353
354
Quilters securing program
Quilting straight stitch
Piecing stitch / Straight stitch
Stippling stitch
Hand-look quilt stitch
Blanket stitch
Double blanket stitch
Blindstitch
Feather stitch
- 338 Feather stitch variations
- 345, 351 Decorative quilt stitches
- 350 Quilt stitch / Hand-look quilt stitch variations
Blanket stitch (dual)
Double blanket stitch (dual)
Satin stitch
™ touch the stitch of your choice
• the stitch is activated
• all information on-screen is visible
• stitch widths/stitch lengths can be altered and customized
136
Quilt Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 137
Important Information on Different Techniques
Patchwork, Appliqué and Quilting
Patchwork
• with this technique fabric of different colors,
forms and patterns are sewn together
to make blankets, wall hangings and
garments
• for the design of patchwork basic geometric
forms are most suitable, e.g. different
rectangular and triangular forms as well as
squares
Stitch for patchwork:
• No. 326 Piecing stitch / Straight stitch
Appliqué
• to appliqué is to apply patches of fabric by
sewing or embroidering on the base fabric
• apart from creative and artistic designing
the appliqué technique also makes it
possible to cover damaged areas in a clever
way
Following stitches can be used:
• No. 354 Satin stitch
• No. 329, 330, 352, 353 Blanket stitches
• No. 331 Blindstitch
Quilting
Quilts consist of three layers:
• decorative top layer of fabric (usually
patchwork)
• middle layer - batting
• bottom layer in plain fabric used as lining
After these three layers, which result in a
«quilt sandwich», have been pinned and
basted they are sewn together with different
stitches. This is called quilting.
Following stitches are suitable for quilting:
• Nr. 324 Quilters securing program
• Nr. 325 Quilting straight stitch
• Nr. 328, 346–350 Hand-look quilt stitche s
• Nr. 327, 331–345, 351 Decorative quilt
stitches
Quilt Stitches – Summary
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
137
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 138
Quilters Securing Program
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Quilters securing program No. 324
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative or monofilament
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Walking foot No. 50 (optional accessory)
Applications
Quilters Securing Program
• suitable for all fabrics and quilting
• secures beginning and end of seam
Note:
For work which is subject to
heavy wear or washing, use
Securing stitch No. 5.
Preparation
™ prepare a «quilt sandwich» by placing the
batting between the lining and the top layer
™ pin and base the «quilt sandwich»
Beginning the Seam
• the sewing computer automatically secures at
the beginning (six small stitches forwards)
™ continue sewing until shortly before the end
Ending the Seam
™ press and release the Quick Reverse button on
head frame. The sewing computer secures
automatically (six small stitches forwards) and
stops automatically.
TIP
Perfect stitch formation
When using thick fabric lengthen the
stitch length.
138
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
TIP
Needle stop down
A great help when quilting.
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 139
Quilting Straight Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Quilting straight stitch No. 325
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative or monofilament
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Walking foot No. 50 (optional accessory)
Quilting Straight Stitch
• this quilt stitch is a straight stitch with a longer
basic setting for machine quilting
• suitable for all fabrics and quilting
Preparation
™ prepare a «quilt sandwich» by placing the
batting between the lining and the top layer
™ pin and base the «quilt sandwich»
Outline Quilting (Echo Quilting)
• allows you to add decorative elements
™ echo quilt in regular distances from the
patchwork seams or around the form of the
applied motif
Pattern Quilting
• allows you to add decorative elements
™ allows you to sew as many lines and forms on
the work as desired
Shadow Quilting
• suitable for work where no
additional effect is desired apart
from the effect of the fabric strips
sewn together
™ sew with the quilt stitch directly on
the seam lines of the work
TIPS
Perfect stitch formation
When using thick fabric lengthen the
stitch length.
Invisible quilt effect
If a monofilament thread is used the
quilted seam looks invisible.
Needle stop down
A great help when quilting.
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
139
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 140
Piecing Stitch / Straight Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Piecing stitch / Straight stitch No. 326
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Patchwork foot No. 37 (optional accessory)
Piecing Stitch / Straight Stitch
• this piecing stitch is a short straight stitch
• suitable for piecing all patchwork
Sewing
™ pin fabric strips and sew them together
Sewing With Stitch Counter Function
For patchwork which consists of several strips of
the same size, it helps to use the Stitch Counter
function as well.
™ touch symbol, the Stitch Counter function is
activated
™ sew until the desired length is reached
™ press external Quick Reverse button
• the number of sewn stitches is programmed
(temporarily)
• further fabric patches can be sewn together
with the same programmed length (the sewing
computer automatically stops at the end)
140
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 141
Hand-look Quilt Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Needle thread:
Bobbin thread
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Hand-look quilt stitches No. 328, 346–350
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
monofilament
50 or 30 weight cotton
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Walking foot No. 50 (optional accessory)
Hand-look Quilt Stitch
• suitable for all fabrics and work which should
look «hand sewn»
Sewing a Test
• the bobbin thread has to be brought up; one
stitch is visible (bobbin thread) and one stitch
is invisible (monofilament thread), which results
in the hand-look effect
Upper Thread Tension
• the upper thread tension is automatically set
• increase upper thread tension to suit fabric
if necessary
Balance
• adjust stitch with the Balance if necessary
Sewing
• the hand-look quilt stitch can be sewn in any
needle position
TIP
Perfect corners
™ activate Pattern End and Needle Stop (the
sewing computer automatically stops with the
needle down) and pivot the work
™ when pivoting make sure that the needle ends
in a down position, pivot and begin stitching
TIP
Monofilament thread breaks
If the monofilament thread breaks, sew more
slowly and/or reduce the upper thread tension
slightly.
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
141
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:25 Uhr
Seite 142
Decorative Quilt Stitches
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Decorative quilt stitches No. 327, 332–345, 351
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton or decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Decorative Quilt Stitches
• suitable for all fabrics and quilting
• especially applicable for crazy quilting
Preparation
™ prepare a «quilt sandwich» by placing the
batting between the lining and the top layer
™ pin and base the «quilt sandwich»
Sewing
™ select quilt stitches and sew
• when applying crazy quilting the decorative quilt
stitches are sewn over the patches as required
• all quilt stitches can be combined in the Combi
Mode
TIP
TIP
Perfect stitch formation
™ when using thick fabric lengthen the stitch length
™ adjust stitch with the Balance if necessary
Perfect corners
Activate Pattern End and Needle Stop (the sewing
computer automatically stops with the needle
down) and pivot the work.
TIP
Stippling stitch No. 327
The stippling stitch can be enlarged by using the
Sideways motion stitch No. 515 or stitch No. 516.
142
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 143
Satin Stitch
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Satin Stitch No. 354
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, polyester, decorative
up (sewing position)
Appliqué foot No. 23 (optional accessory),
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Satin Stitch
• applying decorative appliqués
• suitable for many fabrics
Note:
Instead of double-sided adhesive
stabilizer use fabric spray adhesive.
Preparation of Appliqué
• double-sided adhesive stabilizer helps to fix the motif on the
base fabric and prevents it from creasing when sewing
™ design the motif in original size
™ copy a mirror image of the motif onto the paper side of the
stabilizer and cut out roughly
™ press the stabilizer onto the wrong side of the appliqué fabric
(coated side lies on the fabric, see picture 1)
1
™ cut exactly along the motif (see picture 2)
™ tear off paper side (see picture 2)
2
™ place motif on base fabric (see picture 3)
™ if necessary place additional stabilizer under the base fabric
(e.g. embroidery stabilizer) to give fabric extra stability
3
Sewing Appliqué
™ secure the motif by oversewing the edge of the appliqué
™ the stitch goes slightly over the edge of the motif into the
base fabric on the right swing of the needle (if required alter
the needle position accordingly)
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
143
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 144
Sewing Rectangular Corners (90°)
™ sew 3-4 stitches over the outer fabric edge
™ stitch over edge of the motif, needle position
down and turn sewing
™ continue sewing, the corner will be oversewn
twice
Sewing Obtuse Inside Corners (100°)
™ sew until the needle is down in the middle of
the angle inside the motif
™ sew the corner in form of sun rays, i.e. needle
down always at the same point on the motif,
turn sewing slightly, sew two stitches, etc.
Sewing Mitered Corners
™ sew up to about 3/8” (1cm) before the corner
™ when continuing to sew reduce the stitch width
slightly (almost 0)
™ stitch right into the middle of the corner, needle
position down (outside the motif) and turn
sewing
™ continue sewing and set the stitch width to its
original setting in the first 3/8” (1cm)
Sewing Curves
™ sew slowly and stop often:
™ inner curves (1): needle position down inside the
curve
™ outer curves (2): needle position down outside
the curve
™ turn sewing slightly and continue sewing
™ repeat several times so that a nice and regular
curve is obtained
TIP
Securing
Sew a few straight
stitches within the
satin stitch
TIPS
Needle stop down
Needle stays in fabric when pivoting and turning.
Sewing speed
Reduced sewing speed allows better precision.
Perfect stitch formation
Different fabric types may make it necessary to
alter the stitch length and width.
144
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 145
Blanket Stitches
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Blanket stitches No. 329, 330, 352, 353
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
cotton, decorative
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C or
Open embroidery foot No. 20C
Blanket Stitches
• stitches No. 329 and No. 352 are for light- to
mediumweight fabrics
• stitches No. 330 and No. 353 are for mediumto heavyweight fabrics
Sewing With Blanket Stitch No. 329 or No. 330
(Double Blanket Stitch)
• particularly suitable for appliqué
™ prepare motifs for appliqué and place on fabric
™ sew along the appliqué
• make sure that the vertical parts of the stitch are
sewn on the outside edge next to the appliqué
on the base fabric and the horizontal parts of
the stitch are placed on the appliqué
•
For more information on «Sewing Appliqués»
see pages 146-147 •••••••••••••••
Sewing With Blanket Stitch No. 352 (dual) or
No. 353 (Double Blanket Stitch (dual))
• suitable for appliqué, attaching ribbons and
sewing fabric strips, couching decorative threads
or yarns
™ prepare work
™ sew exactly on the edge between the appliqués
or ribbons
• make sure that the vertical parts of the stitch are
sewn directly between the appliqué or strips and
the horizontal parts of the stitch are placed on
the appliqué or strips to the left and right of
both edges
TIP
Hand-stitched effect
• for a hand-stitched effect increase the stitch length and width
according to the fabric
• for single blanket stitch, thread a 90 needle with two threads (using
two spools and threading as one) for a hand-stitched effect
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
145
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 146
Turned-edge Appliqués
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Blindstitch No. 331
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
monofilament
up (sewing position)
Reverse pattern foot No. 1C
Turned-edge Appliqué
• the motifs with turned edges are sewn on the
base fabric
• with monofilament thread the seam is hardly
visible
Preparation
™ draw a mirror image of the motif on the non adhesive side of
a slightly stronger press-on stabilizer
™ cut out stabilizer along the outline with scissors or rotary cutter
™ press the stabilizer onto the wrong side of the appliqué fabric
(make sure that the stabilizer sticks well)
™ cut all around the fabric with an allowance of approximately
6mm
™ snip allowance every 5mm (closer together in narrow curves)
™ fold allowance over the stabilizer edge to the wrong side.
The form is determined by the pressed on stabilizer.
Smooth edges with finger.
™ press and if necessary correct form irregularities
Sewing
™ place motif on base fabric and pin or use spray adhesive
™ sew appliqué with the blindstitch clockwise all around
™ sew that only the tips of the stitch (left points of stitch) are
placed in the appliqué motif
146
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 147
Variations
Use Paper Template Instead of Press-on Stabilizer
™ use thicker paper as template instead of press-on stabilizer
• by removing the paper before sewing, the appliqué will be softer
(covers, cushions, etc.)
™ draw motif on the thicker paper and prepare the appliqué
as described (press the allowance around the paper template)
™ remove paper after pressing
™ pin motif and sew
Freezer Paper
freezer paper is well known in quilter circles and is used instead
of press-on stabilizer
™ work on appliqué as described using spray adhesive on freezer
paper to attach it to the appliqué fabric
™ press allowance onto the shiny side
™ sew the motif, however stop shortly before the end and pull out
the freezer paper through the opening
•
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
147
s135-148_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 148
Freehand Quilting
Stitch:
Needle:
Thread:
Feed dog:
Presser foot:
Quilting straight stitch No. 325
size and type suitable for the fabric selected
monofiliament, cotton or decorative
down (darning position)
Darning foot No. 9 or Quilting foot No. 29
(optional accessory)
Preparation
™ prepare a «quilt sandwich» by placing the
batting between the lining and the top layer
™ pin and baste the «quilt sandwich»
Freehand Quilting
• for all freehand quilt work
9
Holding the Work
™ hold and guide the fabric with both hands
™ start quilting in the center and work out towards
the edges
Quilting a Design
™ turn the work using smooth, round movements
to form the design of your choice (either freehand or following a template)
Stipple Quilting
• this technique covers the entire surface of the
fabric
• the lines of stitching are rounded without any
sharp corners; they never cross or touch one
another
TIP
TIP
Freehand quilting and darning
Both techniques are based on the same
free-motion principles.
Poor stitch formation
• if the thread forms loops, the work is being
moved too quickly
• if knots are forming on the wrong side, the
work is being moved too slowly
• place fabric in a hoop for easier guiding
148
TIP
TIP
Monofilament thread breaks
If the monofilament thread breaks, sew more slowly
and/or reduce the upper thread tension slightly.
Thread breaks
Usually as a result of sudden or jerky movements –
move the fabric smoothly and at an even pace.
Quilt Stitches – Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s149-152_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 149
Programming Screen 150
Selecting Motifs 151
Deleting Motifs 151
Altering Motifs 152
Personal
Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s149-152_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 150
Programming Screen With Personal Stitches
Use the Personal Program to design a screen with
the stitches you use most.
Whether it is made up of stitches for a certain type
of sewing, such as heirloom or garment, or just
your favorite practical and decorative stitches or
alphabets, this screen will make it easy and quick
to sew any project.
When inserting stitches into the Personal Program,
variations of all stitches may be entered into the
Personal Program.
Note:
Following alterations may be entered:
• stitch width
• stitch length
• Needle Position
• Thread Tension
• Mirror Image
• Pattern Extend
• Long Stitch
• Balance
• Pattern Repeat 1 – 9
Programming First Stitch
™ select the zig-zag stitch from the Practical Stitch
program (make alterations if necessary)
™ touch the Stitch Altering Area (light blue)
• a special screen appears
™ touch the bar «Add to Personal Program»
• the zig-zag stitch is saved in the Personal
Program (including any alterations), the special
screen closes
Programming Second Stitch
™ press the Buttonhole button
™ select Standard buttonhole (No. 51)
™ touch the Stitch Altering Area (light blue)
• a special screen appears
™ touch the bar «Add to Personal Program»
• the Standard buttonhole is saved in the Personal
Program, the special screen closes
™ add further stitches in the same manner
150
Personal Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s149-152_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 151
Selecting Stitches in Personal Program
Activating Personal Program
™ press the Personal Program button
Personal Screen
• in the personal screen the programmed stitches
are visible (progressive stitch numbers)
• when more than 15 stitches are programmed,
use arrow to scroll for viewing additional stitches
•
for more information on Selecting Programmed
Buttonhole see page 118 ••••••••••••••••••••
Deleting Personal Stitches
Activating Personal Program
™ press the Personal Program button
Personal Program Screen
™ select the stitch to be deleted
™ touch the Stitch Altering Area (light blue)
• a special screen appears
™ touch the bar «Remove from Personal Program»
Stitch Deleted
• the special screen closes
• the selected stitch is deleted, all remaining stitches
will move along to fill the space
Personal Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
151
s149-152_e
19.4.2004
16:26 Uhr
Seite 152
Altering Stitches
Activating Personal Program
™ press the Personal Program button
Personal Program Screen
™ select the stitch to be altered (e.g. zig-zag)
™ alter stitch width and length with the external
stitch width and stitch length knobs
• the alterations as well as the basic settings are
indicated
™ touch the Stitch Altering Area (light blue)
• a special screen appears
™ touch the bar «Save Settings» and all alterations
are saved, the special screen closes
Special Screen
• «Save Settings»: all alterations (stitch length and
width, etc.) of the selected stitch are saved
•
«Reset Settings»: all alterations of the selected
stitch are reset to basic settings
•
«Add to Personal Program»: a selected stitch
(with possible alterations) is saved in the Personal
Program
•
«Remove from Personal Program»: a selected
stitch is deleted from the Personal Program
•
touch «ESC» – the screen closes without anything
being saved
• for more information on Saving Altered Settings Permanently see page 24 •••••••••••••
TIP
The possible alterations of the original
stitch setting can also be altered
permanently in each category.
152
Personal Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 153
Programming and Saving 154
• In general • Stitch combinations
• Opening saved combinations
Corrections and Alterations 157
• Deleting • Inserting stitch combinations
• Sub-dividing combinations
Saving and Deleting
Stitches and Stitch
Combinations
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 154
In General
Stitches, letters, and numbers can be combined
and stored in the memory system. The sewing
computer has a memory system, in which the two
memories – sewing and embroidery – can be
stored. The storage space is not sub-divided into
fixed spaces, i.e. any number of stitch combinations can be stored in the Drawers as long as there
is free storage space
(capacity) available. It may well be, however, that
not all Drawers can be filled, due to the saving of
many stitches or stitch combinations.
The memory is a long term memory, i.e. the
contents remain in it until deliberately deleted.
A power cut, or switching off («0») the sewing
computer do not affect the saved program.
Programming and Saving
Programming and Saving Stitch Combinations
Programming and Saving Stitches
™ select Combi Mode
• the Stitch Altering Area appears with its functions
™ select desired stitch
™ alter stitch length, stitch width, needle position or
functions such as mirroring, etc. if necessary
™ select further stitches
™ touch the Multifunction button
™ touch «Save Combination» to save the combination
™ select the Drawer where you wish to save the stitch
combination
• the System Memory Capacity (Free Capacity) is
shown in percentage (%) in a bar above the
Drawers screen
154
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations – Programming and Saving
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 155
Programming and Saving Stitches by Number
™ select Combi Mode
™ touch «0–9» button
™ enter number of desired stitch
™ touch arrow to delete individual numbers
™ touch field above the numeric pad to delete all numbers
™ touch «Add» to select further stitches by number
™ touch «OK» if selection is complete
™ touch the Multifunction button
™ touch the function «Save Combination»
™ select the Drawer where you wish to save the stitch combination
Empty Stitch Altering Area
if the Combi Mode has already been in use and the sewing
computer has not been switched off («0») since, the last
programmed or selected stitch combination appears in the Stitch
Altering Area
™ empty the Stitch Altering Area by deleting combination or open
an empty Drawer to program a new combination
•
Emptying the Stitch Altering Area in Steps
• the stitch above the cursor is deleted
™ touch the Delete function until the Stitch Altering Area is empty
Emptying the Stitch Altering Area in a Single Step
™ touch the Multifunction button
™ select «Delete Combination»
™ touch «Yes» to confirm the message
• the Stitch Altering Area is now empty, and a new stitch
combination can be programmed
Note:
This procedure does not affect
stitch combinations already saved,
which remain intact.
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations – Programming and Saving
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
155
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 156
Opening Empty Drawer
™ touch the «File Drawers» button
• Drawers screen appears
™ select an empty Drawer
• the System Memory Capacity (Free Capacity) is shown in
percentage (%) in a bar above the Drawers screen
the Stitch Altering Area is now empty, and a new stitch
combination can be programmed
™ if desired, save the stitch combination
•
Drawer Content at a Glance
™ program a stitch combination
• the corresponding stitch combination is visible in the
Stitch Altering Area
™ touch the Multifunction button
™ select «Preview»
• the stitch combination is displayed on screen
• each stitch can be selected directly, e.g. to alter it:
™ select stitch, SAA appears automatically to alter selected
stitch
™ use the arrows to scroll through the stitch combinations
™ use the Binocular icon to switch to the Preview screen
(sewing view)
™ touch «ESC» to close the Preview screen
Opening Saved Combination
Opening a Saved Combination
™ touch «File Drawers»
• a summary of the saved combinations appears
™ scroll to the desired Drawer if necessary
™ touch the desired Drawer
• the saved combination appears in the Stitch Altering Area
156
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations – Programming and Saving
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 157
Correcting Stitch Combinations
Deleting the Stitch Last Programmed
™ touch «Delete»
• the stitch last entered is deleted
Note:
All alterations always affect the
area above the cursor.
Deleting a Stitch Within the Combination
™ use the scroll arrows to move the cursor below the stitch to
be deleted, or select the stitch directly
™ touch «Delete»
• the stitch above the cursor is deleted
• the stitches are automatically recombined
Corrections and Alterations
Inserting Stitches
™ to activate the desired place, scroll the cursor or select
appropriate stitch directly (new stitch is inserted after the
selected stitch)
• to insert a stitch at the very beginning of a combination,
move the cursor right to the top using the scroll arrow
™ select new stitch
• the new stitch is inserted above the cursor
Altering Stitch Combinations
™ to activate the desired place, scroll the cursor or select the
appropriate stitch directly
™ select desired function (e.g. mirroring)
Note:
Already saved stitch combinations can be
altered or corrected in the same way. To save
corrections and alterations permanently, the
combination must be resaved afterwards.
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations – Corrections and Alterations
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
157
s153-158_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 158
Mirroring Entire Combinations
™ touch Multifunction button
™ touch «Mirror Combination»
• the entire combination is mirrored horizontally (left/right)
Sub-dividing Combinations
• a combination can be divided into different parts with the
function «Combination Sub-Divider (2)» (e.g. name, street,
place, etc.)
™ sew the first part, the sewing computer stops automatically
when reaching the Sub-divider function
™ reposition the fabric: press the foot control and the next part
is sewn, etc.
• when using the «Combination Sub-Divider (1)», only that
particular part of the sub-division is sewn where the cursor is
placed allowing you to program many stitches in one file, but
use the «Combination Sub-Divider (1)» to treat each segment
as its own file
Deleting Drawer
Option 1: Overwriting
™ program new stitch combination
™ touch Multifunction button
™ touch the «Save» button (Drawers screen appears)
™ select the Drawer you wish to overwrite
™ confirm message with «Yes»
• the new stitch combination is now saved in this Drawer
Option 2: Deleting
™ touch the button «File Drawers»
• saved combinations appear
™ touch «Delete»
• a message appears: select the combination you wish to delete
™ touch desired Drawer to delete combination
™ touch «ESC» to close Drawers screen
158
Saving and Deleting Stitches and Stitch Combinations – Corrections and Alterations
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 159
In General 160
Display 161
Sewing Settings 162
Embroidery Settings 163
Touch (Screen Sensitivity) 165
Customize Favorite Function
Button 166
Software and Language 166
Messages and Audio
Settings 167
Portal Provider Settings 169
Reset to Factory 170
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 160
In General
The Setup Program allows you to personalize the
touch screen to suit your own requirements and
preferences. For example, you can change the
setting of the thread tension or reprogram the
Favorite Function button on the head frame. After
setting the sewing computer to your personal
requirements all changes made in the Setup
Program will be saved, even when the sewing
computer is turned off («0»). The sewing computer
can be reset and returned to the factory settings at
any time.
Note:
If factory set embroidery motifs are deleted
or overwritten, they can be restored by
downloading the enclosed CD-ROM onto
the embroidery computer.
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu with Setup options appears
Menu
• the menu lists all features in the sewing computer
which can be altered to suit your requirements:
• Display (screen)
• Sewing Settings
• Embroidery Settings
• Touch (screen sensitivity)
• Customize Favorite Function button
• Software and Language
• Messages and Audio Settings
• Portal Provider Settings
• Hardware
• Reset to Factory
• the customized alterations remain saved even
when the sewing computer is turned off («0»)
• the alterations can be reprogrammed at any time
Leaving Setup Program
™ touch «ESC»
• the Setup Program closes
• returns to previous screen
160
To Next Page
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the next screen appears
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes
and the menu appears
To Previous Page
™ touch «To Previous Page»
• the previous screen appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original
settings remain saved and the menu
appears
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 161
Display
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Display»
• the screen «Display Settings» with the possible settings for
the screen appears
Display Settings
Contrast
™ touch «+» or «–»
• the contrast of the screen changes
Brightness
™ touch «+» or «–»
• the brightness of the screen changes
• the changes are indicated by the number in the bar and the
blue background of the «+» or «-»
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic
settings
Welcome Screen
™ touch Text bar
• a screen with a keyboard appears
Text in Welcome Screen
• text for the Welcome screen can be written
• the «ABC» on-screen button (upper case) is automatically
active (blue)
• the «abc/123» on-screen button changes to lower case and
numbers
• the «@#» and «å æ» on-screen button activates special
characters
• the bar below the keyboard is a space bar and produces
spaces between the words or letters
• the programmed text appears in the Text bar above the
keyboard
™ by touching this Text bar the programmed text will be
completely deleted
™ by touching the arrow on the right of the Text bar, entered
text is deleted from right to left
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the menu appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings remain saved
and the menu appears
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
161
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 162
Sewing Settings
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Sewing Settings»
• the screen «Sewing Settings 1» appears
Sewing Settings 1
Sewing Light
• when the bar is active (blue) the sewing light will be on
continuously when the sewing computer is turned on
• when the bar is inactive (x) the sewing light will not come on
when the sewing computer is turned on
Motor Speed
™ touching «+» or «–» changes the maximum speed (4/4).
It increases or reduces the speed by 10 stitches
• the number in the bar reflects the stitches per minute
• any change of the maximum speed affects all 4 speeds
(1/4 – 4/4), i.e. slower or faster at all four levels
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic settings
Thread Tension Correction
™ touching «+» or «–» changes the basic setting (0) of the
upper Thread Tension by plus or minus 20%
0 = basic settings (factory settings)
1 = + 10%
2 = + 20%
-1 = - 10%
-2 = - 20%
• this correction fine tunes the basic tension setting on your
sewing computer, which may be affected by variables such as
thread weight, etc.
• the number in the bar and the blue background of the «+»
or «–» reflect the changes
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic settings
• the tension alteration affects all stitches and remains saved
when the sewing computer is turned off («0»)
162
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 163
Embroidery Settings
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Embroidery Settings»
• the screen «Embroidery Settings 1» appears for adjusting the
embroidery hoop
Embroidery Settings 1
«Adjust Reference Position» calibrates the needle to the center of
the embroidery hoop. Adjusting can only be activated if the
embroidery module and the oval embroidery hoop are attached.
It is only necessary to adjust the Reference Position once as the
same setting changes will apply to all the hoops.
™ insert the embroidery template into the hoop
™ touch «Check»
• the hoop position is read and the needle positioned in the
middle (the needle should now be positioned exactly over the
center point of the template)
™ if it is not, adjust with the arrows
™ touch «OK»
• the adjustment will be saved, the screen display closes and the
menu appears
Embroidery Settings 2
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the screen «Embroidery Settings 2» appears
Motor Speed
• touching «+» or «–» changes the basic settings of the speed by
10 stitches
• the number in the bar reflects the stitches per minute
• any change of the speed affects all 4 speeds (1/4 – 4/4), i.e.
slower or faster at all four levels
Auto Thread Cutter
• when the bar is active (blue) the upper thread and bobbin
thread are automatically cut
• when the bar is inactive (x) the Automatic Thread Cutter is off
™ touching the bar «Auto Thread Cutter» activates or deactivates
the function
Thread Tension Correction
™ touching «+» or «–» changes the basic setting (0) of the upper
Thread Tension by plus or minus 20%
0 = basic settings (factory settings)
1 = + 10%
2 = + 20%
-1 = - 10%
-2 = - 20%
• this correction fine tunes the basic tension setting on your
sewing computer, which may be affected by variables such as
thread weight, etc.
• the number in the bar and the blue background of the «+» or
«–» reflect the changes
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic settings
• the tension alteration affects all stitches and remains saved
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
163
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 164
To Next Page
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the next screen appears
To Previous Page
™ touch «To Previous Page»
• the previous screen appears
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes
and the menu appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original
settings remain saved and the menu
appears
164
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 165
Touch (Screen Sensibility)
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Touch»
• the screen «Touch Setup» appears for calibrating the touch
sensitivity of the screen
Touch Setup
™ touch «+» or «–»
• the touch sensitivity changes
• the changes are indicated by the number in the bar and the
blue background of the «+» or «-»
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic
settings
™ after having changed the sensitivity touch the «Calibrate» bar
• a further screen display appears
Touch 2
• to activate the new data follow the instructions on the screen
• an additional screen display appears
Touch 3
• to save the new data follow the instructions on the screen
• the screen «Touch Setup» appears again
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the menu appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings remain saved
and the menu appears
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
165
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:27 Uhr
Seite 166
Customize Favorite Function Button
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Customize Favorite Function Button»
• the screen «Customize Favorite Function Button» appears
Customize Favorite Function Button
• the basic setting on the Favorite Function button is «Pattern
Begin», which is visible as active function in the «F» bar
™ from the on-screen function button summary another desired
function can be selected, e.g. «Motor Speed»
•
•
the selected function is immediately visible as active function
in the «F» bar
the programmed function is shown with an «F» in the display
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the menu
appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings remain
saved and the menu appears
Software and Language
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Software and Language»
• the screen «Software and Language» appears with information
on software version and active language
Software Version
• the current version of the sewing computer and the embroidery
module (has to be attached to the sewing computer) can be seen
Language
• the active language is displayed
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the menu
appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings remain
saved and the menu appears
166
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 167
Messages and Audio Settings
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Messages and Audio Settings»
• the screen «Messages and Audio Settings Page 1» appears
Messages and Audio Settings Page 1
Audio System
• with this bar the sound can be activated or deactivated
• blue background and gray speaker means that the bar is active
• gray background and red speaker means that the bar is inactive
Test Speaker
• with this on-screen button the speaker function can be checked
™ touch and release the button
• a sound must be heard to indicate Audio System is active
Volume
™ touching «+» or «-» changes the volume
• the number in the bar and the blue background of the «+» or
«-» reflect the changes
• the «Default» on-screen button returns you to the basic settings
Selecting Stitch / Selecting Function
• the selection of stitches and functions can be indicated
acoustically
™ touch either the bar «Select Function» or the Sound button for
selection of sounds
• 1-6 sound choices will be activated, both bar and Sound button
are blue and the choice of selected sounds is indicated in the
on-screen Sound button by a number (1-6)
™ touch the Sound button one or more times and the six
possible sounds can be heard (number changes from 1-6)
™ the sounds can be turned off as follows:
™ touch the bar «Select Stitch» and/or «Select Function» one or
more times
• the bars will be inactive (gray) and the speaker symbols in the
on-screen button «Sound» will be red
Messages and Audio Settings Page 2
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the screen «Messages and Audio Settings Page 2» appears
• following messages can be turned on or off as well as
indicated acoustically with the desired choice of sounds (1-6):
• Upper Thread Control
• Feed Dog Position
• Lower Thread Control
• Presser Foot Position
• the messages and choice of sounds can be turned on or off
independently (i.e. a message can be turned on without any
acoustic sound)
• blue background means that the bar or button is activated
• gray background means that the bar or button is deactivated
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
167
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 168
Messages and Audio Settings Page 3
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the screen «Messages and Audio Settings Page 3» appears
• following messages can be turned on or off as well as indicated
acoustically with the desired choice of sounds (1-6):
• Bobbin Winder
• Embroidery Finished
• Thread Cutter
• Threader
• the messages and choice of sounds can be turned on or off
independently (i.e. a message can be turned on without any
acoustic sound)
• blue background means that the bar or button is activated
• gray background means that the bar or button is deactivated
To Next Page
™ touch «To Next Page»
• the next screen appears
To Previous Page
™ touch «To Previous Page»
• the previous page appears
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the
menu appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings
remain saved and the menu appears
168
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 169
Portal Provider Settings
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Portal Provider Settings»
• the screen «Portal Provider Settings» appears
Portal Provider Settings
• the screen display contains the summary of the set providers
(your provider’s address)
• up to three different providers can be set - selection of
provider may be made by touching the red circle, circle
becomes a
™ touch the bar of the selected provider or «To Next Page»
Note:
For Modem settings see separate Modem
instruction manual.
Provider 1
• the screen e.g. «Provider 1» appears, the provider settings are
displayed
• the provider settings are made as follows:
™ select an empty provider space on the screen «Portal Provider
Settings», (e.g. Provider 3)
Provider 3
• the screen «Provider 3» appears
™ touch the bar «Provider»
Note:
How to establish a connection from the
Modem to a Portal provider see page 185.
• a screen with a keyboard appears
™ the necessary information for this bar can be entered
™ touch «OK»
• the entered information will be saved, the screen display
closes and the screen «Portal Provider 3» appears again
• fill in all bars in this manner
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the menu appears
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
169
s159-170_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 170
Hardware
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Hardware»
• the screen «SSID» appears
SSID (Service Set Identifier)
™ touch SSID bar
• a screen with a keyboard appears
™ if necessary delete «ANY» and enter
the SSID from your access point
Reset to Factory
Opening Setup Program
™ press the external Setup button
• menu appears
™ touch «Reset to Factory»
• a summary of the screen «Reset to Factory» appears
Reset to Factory
• three choices are possible:
• Sewing
• Embroidery
• All
™ touch the on-screen button which you want to «Reset to
Factory»
Saving and Closing
™ touch «OK»
• changes are saved, the screen closes and the
menu appears
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the screen display closes, the original settings
remain saved and the menu appears
Note:
If factory set embroidery motifs are deleted or overwritten, they can be restored by downloading the enclosed
CD-ROM onto the embroidery computer.
170
Setup Program
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 171
Help 172
Tutorial 173
Creative Consultant 175
Balance 177
• Balance for practical and decorative stitches
• Balance for sideways motion stitches
Cleaning and Maintenance 179
Trouble Shooting 180
Sewing and Sewing
Computer Support
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 172
Help Program
The Help program provides on-screen information on individual stitches and all functions on the screen,
eliminating the need to regularly refer to the instruction manual. The information shown corresponds to
information in the instruction manual, but is quicker and easier to find electronically.
No matter which screen is displayed, the help feature for stitches and functions of the screen can be
opened. Touch «ESC» to return to the previous screen.
Note:
When you press the question mark in both sewing and embroidery, the motor is disabled
and you can leave your computer. When returning to the computer, to enable your work,
please press any spot on the display screen. The motor will be enabled and you can resume
your work. The question mark is now a multi-function icon – it allows you to safely leave
your computer while sewing or embroidering and it retains its function of giving information
on features and functions.
Opening Help
™ touch Help «?» on the screen
™ touch desired stitch or function
Note:
The Help program can be opened at any time
without affecting the work at hand.
Help
Help Screen/Stitches
the screen offers the following information:
• name of the stitch
• suitable fabrics
• brief listing of main applications
Help Screen/Functions
the screen offers the following information:
• name of the function
• explanation of the function
• brief listing of main applications
Text Scrolling
• this symbol indicates that text scrolling on screen can be activated
with the stitch width or stitch length knob
Back to Previous Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• Help is closed
• the previous screen appears
172
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Help
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 173
Opening Tutorial
™ press external «Tutorial» button
Note:
In computer language, tutorial means self-help.
The Tutorial provides concentrated on-screen
information about various aspects of the sewing
computer, eliminating the need to refer regularly
to the instruction manual.
Subjects
• Main subjects appear:
• Important facts about threading the sewing computer
• Sewing techniques
• Buttonholes
• Peripherals
• Embroidery module
• FHS
• Trouble Shooting
• Presser Feet
• Needles
™ touch symbol (e.g. Presser Feet)
Tutorial
• Presser Feet subjects appear
™ Select the desired subject (e.g. Change Presser Foot)
•
Information on the desired subject appears
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Tutorial
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
173
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 174
To Previous Page / To Next Page
• with the scroll arrows the previous or next
page can be viewed
Back to Subjects
™ touch the «Home» symbol
• the first screen (Subjects) of Tutorial appears
myartista Portal
™ connect the modem
™ touch symbol
™ confirm first message with «Yes» and second
message with «OK»
• the connection to the myartista Portal is made
Video Tutorials
™ touch the «Video» symbol
• the selected subject is demonstrated clearly by
the aid of a video sequence
Back to Previous Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• Tutorial is closed
• the previous screen appears
Text Scrolling
• this symbol indicates that text scrolling on
screen can be resumed with the stitch width
or stitch length knob
174
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Tutorial
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Note:
The Tutorial program can be
opened at any time without
affecting the work at hand.
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 175
The Creative Consultant provides information and help for a variety
of sewing needs. After entering the type of fabric and technique you
wish to use, the Creative Consultant provides suggestions regarding
needles, presser feet, feed dog, stabilizers, presser foot pressure, etc.
The suggested presser feet are not necessarily standard with the
sewing computer but may be special accessories which can be obtained from your BERNINA dealer.
Opening Creative Consultant
™ press external Creative
Consultant button
The Creative Consultant automatically sets the correct settings for
the type of work selected:
• Thread Tension
• stitch width
• stitch length
• Balance
• Needle Position
• Needle Stop up/down
• the maximum sewing speed is adjusted according to the selected
technique
Creative Consultant
Fabric Menu
• three columns of fabric types are displayed:
• lightweight fabrics
• mediumweight fabrics
• heavyweight fabrics
• the most commonly used fabrics are listed in the three columns
• if the fabric you wish to use is not listed, select a similar type of
fabric
™ touch to select the desired fabric (e.g. jersey)
Techniques Menu
• several common sewing techniques appear on-screen:
Seaming
Overcasting
Edgestitching
Blind hem
Buttonhole
Visible Zipper
Invisible zipper
Decorative work
(decorative stitches)
Machine quilting
Freemotion
machine quilting
Hemstitching
Appliqué
Sideways motion
patterns
™ touch to select the desired technique (e.g. buttonhole)
™ if the technique you want to use is not listed, select a similar
technique
• if a technique for the selected fabric is not recommended,
the field becomes inactive (light gray)
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Creative Consultant
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
175
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 176
Information, Special Suggestions
• the third screen displays settings and suggestions for the type
of fabric and technique you have chosen
• Presser foot number(s)
• Needle (size and type)
• Presser foot pressure
• Stabilizer needed
• Feed dog position
• Buttonhole cord (gimp)
• there may be several suggestions for the «Presser Foot» and
«Needle» type
• the most suitable presser foot for the chosen technique is
shown first
• further recommended presser feet are shown in brackets
• some presser feet suggested may be special accessories
which are particularly suitable for the chosen technique
(they may not be standard accessories, but can be purchased
separately from your authorized BERNINA dealer)
• select the presser foot and needle according to your
particular wishes and preferences
• a stabilizer will be suggested if it is required to suit the
technique and fabric
• provides a reminder to use «Buttonhole Cord» (gimp) if
necessary to reinforce a buttonhole
• further notes can be found under «Recommendation»
• «Tutorial Connections»: with these functions detailed
information for further subjects can be opened directly in
the Tutorial
• «Stitches»: programmed and alternative stitches with notes
are listed here
To Previous Page / To Next Page
• with the scroll arrows the previous
or next page can be viewed
Back to Fabric Menu
™ touch the «Home» symbol
• the first screen (Fabric Menu) of
Creative Consultant appears
myartista Portal
™ connect the modem
™ touch symbol
™ confirm first message with «Yes»
and second message with «OK»
• the connection to the myartista
Portal is made
Programmed Stitch
™ touch «OK»
• the appropriate screen with the
programmed stitch appears
automatically
176
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Creative Consultant
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Back to Previous Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• Creative Consultant is closed
• the previous screen appears
Text Scrolling
• this symbol indicates that text
scrolling on screen
can be resumed with the stitch
width or stitch length knob
Note:
The Creative Consultant program
can be opened at any time without
affecting the work at hand.
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 177
All stitches are checked and fully adjusted before the sewing computer leaves the factory.
Different fabrics, threads, stabilizers and interfacings can affect programmed stitches so that sometimes
they might not close or they might overlap, i.e. the stitches that make up the pattern are too close
together or too far apart.
These effects can be corrected with the electronic Balance so that the stitch formation can be adjusted
where necessary to suit the fabric.
Balance for Practical and Decorative Stitches 9mm
When sewing soft fabrics such as jersey or tricot, the fabric tends to stretch under the presser foot which
also stretches the stitch being sewn. For example, the Honeycomb stitch opens up and is too long.
Thicker fabrics might cause the stitch to overlap, making it too short. Correcting with the Balance is very
easy.
Opening Balance
™ touch the function «Balance»
Balance
Balance Screen
• the special Balance screen opens
• in the left portion of the screen the stitch is displayed in its
original form
• in the right portion of the screen the alterations made are
directly visible
• the corrections can be made while sewing (with opened
screen)
Corrections
• the stitch sewn on the fabric (e.g. the Honeycomb stitch)
opens up and it does not look correct:
™ turn the stitch length knob (displayed by a purple symbol on
the screen) until the stitch in the right portion of the screen is
identical with the stitch on the fabric
Saving and Closing Screen
™ touch «OK»
• the corrections will be saved and the Balance screen will close
Deleting Corrections
™ touch «Reset»
• the corrections of the selected
stitches will be deleted
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the Balance screen closes; returns to previous screen
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Balance
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
177
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 178
Balance for Sideways Motion Stitches
Fabric, thread, stabilizers and interfacings can affect sideways motion stitches, so correcting with the
Balance will sometimes be necessary.
Opening Balance
™ touch the function button «Balance»
Balance Screen
• the special Balance screen opens
• in the left portion of the screen the stitch is displayed in its
original form
• in the right portion of the screen the alterations made are
directly visible
• the corrections can be made while sewing (with opened
screen)
The stitch sewn on the fabric (e.g. stitch No. 201) is vertically
and horizontally distorted:
Vertical Corrections
™ turn the stitch length knob (displayed by a purple symbol on
the screen) until the stitch on the right portion of the screen is
identical with the stitch on the fabric
Horizontal Corrections
™ turn the stitch width knob (displayed by a purple symbol on
the screen) until the stitch on the right portion of the screen is
identical with the stitch on the fabric
Saving and Closing Screen
™ touch «OK»
• the corrections will be saved and the Balance screen will close
Closing Screen
™ touch «ESC»
• the Balance screen closes; returns to previous screen
Deleting Corrections
™ touch «Reset»
• the corrections of the selected stitches will be deleted
178
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Balance
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 179
Cleaning
If the sewing computer is stored in a cold room, it should be brought to a warm room about 1 hour
before use.
Cleaning the Stitch Plate Area
Periodically remove thread lint and remnants which collect under the
stitch plate and the hook.
™ turn power switch to «0» (off) and pull out plug from electric outlet
™ remove presser foot and needle
™ open the free arm cover
™ press the stitch plate down at the back right corner
™ lift and remove stitch plate
™ clean the area with the lint brush
™ replace the stitch plate
!
Refer to the safety
instructions!
Cleaning the Screen
™ wipe with a soft, damp cloth
Cleaning and Maintenance
Cleaning the Hook
™ turn power switch to «0» (off) and pull out plug from electric outlet
™ remove the bobbin case
™ clean the hook race using the brush provided or a cotton swab. The
use of any sharp instrument could damage the hook
™ insert the bobbin case
Cleaning the Sewing Computer
™ wipe with a soft, damp cloth
™ if very soiled, wipe with a solution of water and a few drops of
liquid soap on a damp (not wet) cloth
Lubricating
™ turn power switch to «0» (off) and pull out plug from electric outlet
™ squeeze 1 drop of oil into the hook race
™ run the sewing computer for a short time without thread to prevent
oil soiling your work
Important:
Never use alcohol or solvents of any
kind to clean the sewing computer!
Replacing the Sewing Light
Contrary to an ordinary bulb, the CFL sewing light has a better
illumination and a longer life.
Caution:
Please note that a defective CFL sewing light must ONLY be
replaced by an authorized technician. The sewing computer
must be brought to an authorized BERNINA dealer!
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Cleaning and Maintenance
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
179
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 180
Prevention and Remedy of Failures
In most cases you will be able to identify and remedy faults by checking the following.
Check whether:
• the upper and lower threads are threaded
correctly
• the needle is inserted as far up as possible with
the flat side of the shank to the back
• the needle size is correct – check the needle/
thread chart
• the sewing computer is clean – brush out any
thread lint
• the hook race is clean
• any threads are trapped between the tension
discs or under the bobbin case spring
Trouble Shooting
Upper Thread Breaks
• upper thread tension is too tight
• needle is of inferior quality; purchase needles at
your authorized BERNINA dealer
• needle has been inserted incorrectly – the flat
side of the shank must be to the back
• needle is bent or blunt
• poor quality, knotted, old or dried out thread
has been used
• use the correct spool disc
• stitch plate hole or hook tip damaged – take
your sewing computer to your BERNINA dealer
Lower Thread Breaks
• the lower thread tension is too tight
• the bobbin is jammed in the bobbin case.
Remove and replace the bobbin
• the hole in the stitch plate has been damaged
by the needle; this must be polished by an
authorized BERNINA service technician
• the needle is blunt or bent
Skipped Stitches
• wrong needles used; use only 130/705H system
• the needle is blunt, bent or incorrectly inserted;
make sure needle is inserted completely to the
top
• needle is of inferior quality or badly polished
• the needle point does not suit the fabric being
sewn; if necessary, use a ball point for knitted
fabrics and a cutting point for hard leather
• for narrower stitches use a stitch plate with
smaller stitch plate hole (5.5mm, optional
accessory)
180
Needle Breaks
• needle clamp screw loose
• fabric pulled to the front instead of behind the
presser foot
• when sewing over thick area, the fabric was
pushed with the needle still in the fabric; use
Jeans foot
• for more information regarding Needle see
page 19
Faulty Stitching
• remnants of thread between the tension discs:
pull folded, thin fabric (do not use fabric edge)
between the tension discs and clean them by
moving the fabric forwards and backwards on
the left and right side of the thread tension
• remove remnants of thread under the bobbin
case spring
• incorrect threading. Check upper and lower
threads
• use the correct spool disc
• clean and lubricate hook (use only original oiler;
see Cleaning and Lubricating page 179)
Cannot Sew Thick Fabric
• needle/thread combination is not correct (the
thread is too thick for the inserted needle)
• use height compensating tool, when sewing
over a thick seam
Sewing Computer Fails to Run or Runs Slowly
• plug not fully inserted
• turn power switch off («0»)
• sewing computer has been standing in a cold
room
• restart sewing computer
Sewing Computer Sews in Reverse
• Continuous Reverse Sewing function is activated
Defective Sewing Light
• the sewing computer must be brought to a local
BERNINA dealer
Problems With Peripherals
• plug not completely inserted
• restart sewing computer
Lower Thread Indicator Sensor
• bobbin cover is not closed
• not activated in the Setup Program
• remove any thread lint and remnants from the
bobbin case
Upper Thread Indicator Sensor
• not activated in the Setup Program
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Trouble Shooting
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 181
Messages
In special cases messages may appear on the screen.
They serve as a reminder, warning, or confirmation of
selected applications and functions.
Messages
•
Security Program active. Please deactivate before sewing.
•
This number is not available in the sewing
computer!
•
Combi Mode does not support this pattern!
•
Please switch feed dog to sewing position.
•
Please check the upper thread.
•
Bobbin winder is on.
•
Please check the lower thread.
•
Please lower presser foot.
•
Please raise the presser foot.
•
For easier threading it is recommended that the presser foot is
lowered.
•
For threading it is recommended that the needle be in the highest
position.
•
Needle will penetrate stitch plate or presser foot.
•
The sewing/embroidery computer is not functioning correctly.
Please contact your BERNINA dealer.
•
During start-up an error occurred. Please restart the
sewing/embroidery computer. If the problem persists please
contact your BERNINA dealer.
•
The downloaded data is invalid. Please try later.
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Messages
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
181
s171-182_e
19.4.2004
16:28 Uhr
Seite 182
Messages
182
•
The BERNINA Modem cannot be identified. Please insert the
Modem and try again.
•
Cannot dial, please check the phone line and then dial number.
•
The authentication for the provider failed. Please check the username and the password.
•
The communication with the provider was interrupted. Please try
later or use another provider.
•
An unknown error occurred with the Modem. Please try again.
•
You cannot save or delete files on the myartista Portal.
•
A problem occurred in communicating with the myartista Portal.
Please try again.
•
To keep your sewing/embroidery computer performing at its best,
it’s time to complete the following tasks. Remove thread and lint
from beneath the stitch plate, as well as from the feed dog area.
These instructions can be found on page 179 of the manual.
•
It’s time for your regular service check. Please contact your
BERNINA dealer for an appointment.
•
You have opted not to take your sewing/embroidery computer to
your BERNINA dealer for its service check. This message will not
appear until it’s time for the next regular service.
•
Please insert CD-ROM containing video tutorials and press «OK».
•
CD-ROM NOT working!
•
Main Motor failed. Please check hook system.
Sewing and Sewing Computer Support – Messages
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s183-186_e
19.4.2004
16:29 Uhr
Seite 183
BERNINA Computer System 184
Peripherals 184
Connecting Peripherals 186
Connecting
Peripherals
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s183-186_e
19.4.2004
16:29 Uhr
Seite 184
BERNINA Computer System
Connect peripherals (special accessories)
to turn your artista 200 embroidery
computer into an embroidery computer
system, and take your hobby to
unsuspected heights of creativity.
In addition to a direct connection with the
myartista Portal (information source) which takes
you to the Portal site specially created for the
embroidery computer, it is also possible, for
instance, to watch additional video tutorials from
a BERNINA CD-ROM, or to turn your sewing
computer into an embroidery computer by
connecting the embroidery module.
Ask your BERNINA dealer for more information.
Peripherals
The following external devices can be
connected to the artista 200 sewing
computer:
• embroidery module
• BERNINA Modem
• BERNINA CD-ROM drive
Note:
All peripherals are special accessories,
depending on country. Ask your BERNINA
dealer for information!
Embroidery Module
The embroidery module is a great
addition to the sewing computer.
It provides unlimited scope for turning
your creative ideas into reality.
Note:
Please note that the back section of this
manual contains user instructions for the
embroidery computer.
Modem
(for access to myartista Portal)
The BERNINA Modem enables direct access to the
myartista Portal (information source) where the
special Portal pages, programmed for the sewing
computer alone, can be called up onto the artista
200 screen.
184
Connecting Peripherals
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s183-186_e
19.4.2004
16:29 Uhr
Seite 185
Making a Connection
™ connect Modem
™ touch «Portal»
™ confirm message about connecting with «Yes»
™ when the connection to the Provider is made, then confirm
the message that appears with «OK»
• an overview of the myartista Portal site appears
™ select desired page
The content of the myartista Portal is continuously updated.
Note:
The BERNINA Modem includes user instructions!
External CD-ROM Drive
Using the external BERNINA CD-ROM drive, special BERNINA
CD-ROMs (e.g. Video Tutorial) can be opened directly on the
sewing computer.
When this function is visible in the toolbar on a
selected Tutorial page, the application described can
be viewed in a Video Tutorial.
™ touch symbol
• if the desired Video Tutorial is not in the sewing
computer, the message shown on the left appears
™ connect CD-ROM drive
™ touch «OK» and the Video Tutorial will start
™ touch «ESC» and the Video Tutorial screen closes
Note:
The BERNINA CD-ROM drive includes user instructions!
Connecting Peripherals
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
185
s183-186_e
19.4.2004
16:29 Uhr
Seite 186
Connecting Peripherals (Sewing Computer Compatible)
Connecting Peripherals
™ plug external device into socket provided on the
right hand side of sewing computer (look for
symbol)
1
2
3
Caution:
You must only use BERNINA external
devices with the BERNINA artista 200
sewing computer.
1 BERNINA Modem
Ask your BERNINA dealer!
2 BERNINA CD-ROM drive
3 BERNINA embroidery
module
Instructional/Presentations CD-ROM
(for your PC)
This BERNINA CD-ROM is the presentation and
instructional tool that takes you on a virtual journey around the highlights of the new BERNINA
artista 200 sewing and embroidery system.
Please insert it into your PC and enjoy using it to
learn all about your artista 200.
186
Connecting Peripherals
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Inhalt Sticken_e
19.4.2004
16:06 Uhr
Seite 187
Embroidery – Content
The Embroidery Computer
187–206
Important Embroidery Information
207–214
Embroidery
215–238
Saving and Deleting Motifs
239–244
Embroidery Support
245–250
Peripherals and Accessories
251–256
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 187
Setting up the Embroidery
Computer 188
• Details • Standard accessories
• Special accessories
Attaching the Embroidery
Module 191
• Attaching the embroidery module to
the sewing computer • Protecting the
embroidery computer from dust
• Connecting the adapter for free arm
embroidery
General Operating
Instructions 193
• Preparing embroidery computer for
embroidery • Threading upper and
bobbin thread
Selecting Embroidery Motifs 194
• Welcome screen • Embroidery motifs
from the embroidery computer
• Embroidery motifs from an
embroidery card • Embroidery motifs
from a CD-ROM • Embroidery motifs
from the myartista Portal
Starting to Embroider 196
• Selecting the embroidery hoop
• Attaching the embroidery hoop
• Embroidering motifs
On-screen Functions and
Displays 198
• Selection menu • Common functions
and displays of Design Menu Edit 1 and
Edit 2 • Design Menu Edit 1
• Design Menu Edit 2
• Embroidery Menu (Ready)
External Functions 205
The Embroidery
Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 188
Details
1
2
3
4
5
6
Front view
Setting up the Embroidery
Computer
1
8
8
7
Back view
Note:
The side view (handwheel) of the sewing and
embroidery computer with the connecting slot
for embroidery cards and Modem, and the
cable connections are shown on page 9 of the
sewing computer instruction manual.
188
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The Embroidery Computer – Setting up the Embroidery Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Embroidery surface
Embroidery arm
Embroidery hoop connection
Accessory box
Connecting lug right
Connecting lug center
Sewing computer connecting cable
Cable holder
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 189
Standard Accessories
Large oval embroidery hoop (145x255mm)
Template for large oval embroidery hoop
Medium embroidery hoop (100x130mm)
Template for medium embroidery hoop
Small embroidery hoop (72x50mm)
(for normal use and free arm embroidery)
Blue template for normal embroidery
Red template for free arm embroidery
Adapter for free arm embroidery
Embroidery presser foot No. 15
Net for upper thread spools – pull over
upper thread spool for even spooling
Embroidery bobbin case
Soft cover with pocket
USB connecting cable for PC embroidery
software
The Embroidery Computer – Setting up the Embroidery Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
189
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 190
Special (Optional) Accessories
Suitcase system for sewing computer
and embroidery module
Embroidery Mega-Hoop (150x400mm)
Template for Mega-Hoop
Straight stitch plate
BERNINA embroidery cards
BERNINA CD-ROM drive (depending
on country)
BERNINA Modem
BERNINA artista software
190
The Embroidery Computer – Setting up the Embroidery Computer
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 191
Attaching the Module to the Sewing Computer
Attaching the Module to the Sewing
Computer
™ place the module on the sewing computer behind
the free arm
™ push the module from the left towards the
sewing computer so that the connecting lugs
engage in the base plate
Releasing the Cable
• the cable connects the module to the sewing
computer
™ pull the cable out of the holder on the back of
the module
Attaching the
Embroidery Module
Connecting the Cable
™ plug with flat side to the front
™ insert the plug into the socket on the right hand
side of the sewing computer (look for symbol)
Releasing the Cable
™ pull out the plug
Storing the Cable on the Module
™ insert the cable into both cable holders
™ press cable gently to secure
Removing the Module
™ grip the back right corner to lift the module and
remove to the left
Caution!
When connecting the embroidery
module and/or the free-arm adapter,
attention must be paid that all
items are on a flat and even surface!
Caution!
Always separate the module and
sewing computer for transportation.
Never transport them attached.
The Embroidery Computer – Attaching the Embroidery Module
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
191
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 192
Protecting the Embroidery Computer from Dust
Soft Cover
• the soft cover protects from dust and dirt
™ when not using the embroidery computer, leave
the soft cover on
™ attach the part of the soft cover meant for the
embroidery module with the zipper
Connecting the Adapter for Free Arm Embroidery
The adapter is used for embroidering tubular items
(sleeves, trousers, infant items, socks, etc.) on the
free arm of the sewing computer.
Attaching the Adapter to the Sewing Computer
™ push the adapter behind the free arm towards the
sewing computer so that the connecting lugs
engage in the base plate of the sewing computer
Attaching the Module to the Adapter
™ place the module on the adapter with the front
edge of the module as close as possible to the
L-shaped guide on the adapter
™ push the module towards the guide from the left
until the connecting lugs engage in the base plate
of the adapter
Free Arm Embroidery Hoop
• the small, oval embroidery hoop is specially
designed for free arm embroidery
Caution!
Only the small hoop can be used for
free arm embroidery.
Removing the Adapter
™ remove the module from the adapter
™ the rear right corner of the adapter is designed
to be used as a grip
™ hold the adapter with this grip and remove from
the base plate of the sewing computer
192
The Embroidery Computer – Attaching the Embroidery Module
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 193
Preparing the Embroidery Computer for Embroidery
Embroidery Presser Foot
No. 15
™ attach the Embroidery presser
foot No. 15
™ raise the presser foot so that
the embroidery hoop can be
attached
Needles for Embroidery
™ raise the needle so that the
embroidery hoop can be
attached
•
Lower the Feed Dog
™ press the button on the right
side of the sewing computer to
lower the feed dog
for more information on Needles see pages 17-19 •••••••••••
General Operating
Instructions
Straight Stitch Plate (optional accessory)
• the straight stitch plate has a small needle hole. The needle insertion points (upper and lower thread
stitching) are limited, which produces a better embroidery result
™ remove the standard stitch plate and replace it with the straight stitch plate
•
for more information on Stitch Plates see page 17 •••••••••••••
Threading Upper and Bobbin Thread
Threading the Upper Thread
™ attach foam pad and place the upper thread spool
™ when using Rayon or slippery embroidery threads, slip
the net over the upper thread spool
• this prevents the upper thread from slipping and gives
an even thread feed
Threading the Bobbin Thread
™ for embroidery, thread the bobbin
thread through the pigtail tensioner
of the embroidery bobbin case
TIP
Note:
Lower thread indicator sensor will only work when the bobbin
cover is closed, after inserting the embroidery bobbin case.
(Sensor has to be activated in the Setup Program.)
Spool pin
When using metallic or specialty threads, using the
vertical spool pin and the supplementary thread guide
(special accessory) may also help avoid problems.
Note:
While embroidering the bobbin can also be
wound, just like in sewing (see page 13).
The Embroidery Computer – General Operating Instructions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
193
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 194
Switching the Embroidery Computer on
The artista embroidery system is operated
with a combination of external buttons and knobs and
a touch screen.
™ turn power switch to «1» (on)
Welcome Screen
• after turning the embroidery
computer on, the Welcome screen
appears for a few seconds
• a message appears after the
Welcome screen
™ to close the message touch «OK»
Note:
The Welcome screen
can be personalized
in the Setup Program.
Selecting Embroidery
Motifs
Selection Menu
• the Selection menu offers different sources to select motifs
Embroidery Motifs from the Embroidery Computer
«Embroidery Computer» On-screen Button
™ touch «Embroidery Computer» in the Selection menu
• built-in embroidery motifs can be selected with the on-screen
buttons «Alphabets», «Motifs» and «My Designs»
Selecting Alphabets
™ touch «Alphabets» in the Selection menu
• the different alphabets are visible on the display
™ select one of the alphabets
• a screen with a keyboard appears
•
for more information on Lettering see page 226 ••••••••••••
Selecting Motifs
™ touch «Motifs» in the Selection menu
• the motifs appear in color on the display
™ select a motif by touching the appropriate on-screen button
Selecting My Designs
™ touch «My Designs» in the Selection menu
• the saved personal motifs appear in color on the display
™ select a motif by touching the appropriate on-screen button
194
The Embroidery Computer – Selecting Embroidery Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 195
Embroidery Motifs from an Embroidery Card
«Embroidery Card» On-screen Button
™ touch «Embroidery Card»
• the motifs of the embroidery design card (optional accessory)
appear in color on the display (provided that a card is inserted)
™ select a motif by touching the appropriate on-screen button
•
for more information on Embroidery Cards see
page 255 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Embroidery Motifs from a CD-ROM
«CD-ROM» On-screen Button
™ touch «CD-ROM»
• the motifs of the CD-ROM (optional accessory, depending on
the country) appear in color on the display (provided that
CD-ROM drive is connected and a CD-ROM inserted)
™ select a motif by touching the appropriate on-screen button
•
for more information on CD-ROM see page 253
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Embroidery Motifs from myartista Portal
«Portal» On-screen Button
™ touch «Portal»
• a special screen appears for the Modem connection (provided
that the Modem is connected and you are connected to your
service provider)
• as soon as the Modem (optional) is connected, the motifs of
the myartista Portal (information source) appear on the display
™ select a motif by touching the appropriate on-screen button
•
for more information on the myartista Portal
see page 252 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The Embroidery Computer – Selecting Embroidery Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
195
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 196
Selecting the Embroidery Hoop
Design Menu Edit 1
™ select an embroidery motif from the various choices of motifs
• the screen «Design Menu Edit 1» appears
the selected embroidery motif is shown in the most
appropriate (smallest possible) hoop
• the «Hoop» on-screen button shows which
hoop should be attached
™attach the recommended hoop
•
Attaching the Embroidery Hoop
Raising Needle and Embroidery Presser Foot
™ raise needle and embroidery presser foot
™ hold the hoop with the right side of the fabric
up and the attaching mechanism to the left
Starting to
Embroider
Attaching the Hoop
™ pass the hoop under the embroidery
presser foot
™ squeeze the ends of the attaching
mechanism on the side of the hoop
™ position the center points of the
hoop (small attachment clamps) over
the bracket of the embroidery arm
™ push the hoop down until it engages
™ release the attaching mechanism of
the hoop
Removing the Hoop
™ press both ends on the hoop
attaching mechanism towards each
other
™ pull up to remove the hoop
Embroidering Motifs
™ touch «OK» in the Design Menu Edit 1 or press
the Quick Reverse button on head frame
• embroidery computer moves to check if hoop is
attached
Embroidery Menu (Ready)
• the Embroidery menu (Ready) opens with the
embroidery motif
• the embroidery motif is ready to be embroidered
196
The Embroidery Computer – Starting to Embroider
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 197
Starting to Embroider With the Quick Reverse
Button on Head Frame
™ lower the presser foot
™ keep the Quick Reverse button on the head frame depressed
until the embriodery computer starts
• the embroidery computer will sew approximately 6 stitches
and stop automatically
™ raise the presser foot
™ cut the thread tail at the beginning of motif
™ lower the presser foot
™ press the Quick Reverse button to resume embroidering
Starting to Embroider With Foot Control
™ lower the presser foot
™ press the foot control
• the embroidery computer will stop automatically after approx.
6 stitches
™ release the foot control
™ raise the presser foot
™ cut the thread tail at the beginning of motif
™ lower the presser foot
™ continue embroidering by pressing the foot control
Embroidery Screen
• after starting to embroider the Embroidery screen appears
Interrupting With the Foot Control
™ when the embroidery computer is embroidering, press Quick
Reverse button on head frame or tap the foot control lightly
• the embroidery computer will stop immediately
Completing the Color
™ lower the presser foot again
™ press Quick Reverse button or the foot control again
• the embroidery computer embroiders all the sections in the
color activated
• the embroidery computer stops automatically when complete
• both threads are automatically cut with the Automatic Thread
Cutter
• message appears “Color finished attach new thread”
• acknowledge by touching «OK»
Changing Color
• the embroidery computer is automatically ready to embroider
the next color
™ change color of the upper thread accordingly
™ embroider with the new color as described above
Cutting Thread Ends After Embroidery
™ raise the presser foot
™ remove the embroidery hoop from the embroidery arm
™ cut threads close to the motif
™ carefully remove any connecting threads from the embroidered area
™ take care that the bobbin thread is not cut too closely to the
stitch plate when removing the embroidery hoop
The Embroidery Computer – Starting to Embroider
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
197
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 198
Selection Menu
After turning on the embroidery computer or changing from
Sewing to Embroidery Mode, the Selection menu appears. This
happens when a motif is selected or combined with an existing
motif.
Return to Selection Menu
• this function appears after selecting one of the following
functions: «Alphabets», «Motifs» or «My Design»
™ touch symbol
• Selection menu appears
On-screen Functions and Displays
Scroll Up
™ touch symbol one or more times
• the screen content scrolls up to show
more options
™ touch the symbol continuously to scroll
quickly
Scroll Down
™ touch symbol one or more times
• the screen content scrolls down to show
more options
™ touch the symbol continuously to scroll
quickly
«?» (Help) (double function)
Question/Help about a function:
™ touch symbol and select a function
• a description of the selected function
appears
™ close with «ESC»
Closing Special Applications
• this function appears if changing from
Design Menu Edit 1 back to the
Selection menu
™ touch symbol
• the special application closes
• returns to previous screen
Question/Help about a motif:
™ touch symbol and select a motif
• a special screen appears which shows
the following information on the
respective motif:
• name and motif format
• width, height, embroidery time,
stitch count and color number (can
vary according to motif)
™ from this screen the motif can be
opened or deleted directly (or with
«ESC» back to the Selection menu)
Spinning Spool
• the spinning spool shows that the
embroidery computer is calculating
• no operations are possible during the
calculation process
Note:
If you press the question mark the
machine is «locked». If you touch
the screen (anywhere) the machine
will sew again.
198
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 199
Common Functions and Displays of Design Menu Edit 1 and Edit 2
Design Menu Edit 1
After selecting a motif the Design Menu Edit 1
appears. In this menu for example new motifs can
be selected or combinations made by adding or
duplicating.
Design Menu Edit 2
The Design menu has a sub menu called Edit 2
which is used to alter motifs (e.g. Rescale Motif
Proportionally, Mirror Image, Rotate Motif, etc.).
Select Hoop
• display of the most appropriate hoop for the selected motif
™ touch on-screen button
• the display «Select Hoop» appears
• each hoop size is displayed with maximum stitch field in mm
Possible Hoop Selections (display «Select Hoop»)
™ select hoop (Small, Medium, Large Oval or Mega)
• the display closes and the selected hoop is visible on the
«Hoop» on-screen button
™ the display can also be closed by touching the «ESC» onscreen button, without selecting a hoop
Check
Motif Information
™ touch symbol
• the hoop moves vertically so that the size of the
attached hoop may be read in the embroidery
computer
• if only the hoop should be read, touch «Cancel»
• motif stitching area is read next with 4 stops
• lower left
• upper right
• lower right
• upper left
™ acknowledge each stop with «OK»
• attached hoop is displayed
• if no hoop or a too small hoop is attached, an
error message will appear
Motif Center
™ touch symbol
• the center of the motif is displayed by the cursor
• the hoop will be moved until the needle is in the
center of the motif
™ touch symbol again
• on the display the first stitch of the motif will be
marked again by the cursor
™ touch symbol
• a screen appears which shows the following
information on the activated motif:
• width, height, embroidery time, color number and
stitch count, thread colors and thread brand
• because of the complete overview on colors needed
(scroll if necessary), the threads can be laid out
ready before beginning embroidery
Motif Size
• display of motif width and height in mm
Embroidery Time
• display in minutes of the total embroidery
time of the motif selected
Color Numbers
• display of the motif color numbers
™ touch symbol
• the Color Motif display appears
(the display closes by touching the symbol
again)
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
199
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 200
Show Grid
™ touch symbol
• a large cross hair indicates the hoop
center
™ touch symbol again
• because the grid now visible the
motif can be positioned much better
™ touch symbol again and the grid is
switched off
Color Motif Display
™the color sequence can be scrolled with the
arrows
• the display of the selected color is indicated in
the Color Information bar as well as on the
screen
™ touch the Color Information bar
• the screen «Change Color/Brand to» appears
• the current thread color or brand can be
changed
•
Retrieve
• this function appears only when
combining designs
™ touch symbol
• switches between motifs when
combining designs
• active motif is shown in color
• depending on how many times the
function was touched, a motif or
motif combination is shown active
for more information on Changing the Current
Thread Color see page 232 •••••••••••••••
Zoom
™ touch symbol
• displays the motif enlarged by one
step (zoomed in)
™ touch symbol a second time
• displays the motif enlarged by a
further step
™ with the stitch width or stitch length
knob the motif can be scrolled to
view
™ touch symbol a third time
• reverts motif back to original size
«?» (Help)
™touch symbol and select a function
• the explanation of the selected function appears
™ close with «ESC»
Embroidery Menu (Ready)
™ touch «OK»
• the display changes from the Design
Menu Edit 1 to Embroidery menu
(Ready)
Design Menu Edit 1
New Motif
™ touch «New Motif»
• Selection menu appears
™ select new motif or close display with «ESC»
Add Motif
™ touch «Add Motif»
• Selection menu appears
™ select new motif or lettering of your choice or
close display with «ESC»
• motif is added to motif on screen
Duplicate Motif
™ touch «Duplicate»
• the selected motif on screen will be duplicated
automatically
Delete
• this function only appears when combining
designs
™ touch symbol
• deletes the activated motif, the next one
appears in color
200
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 201
Save
™ touch symbol
• the “Save” screen appears
•
To Next Page - Edit 2
™ touch symbol
• Design Menu Edit 1 changes to the
Design Menu Edit 2
for more information on Saving see pages
240-242 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Design Menu Edit 2
Rotate Motif
Move Motif
™ touch symbol
• the purple knob icons for operating the stitch
width and length knob appear
™ to move the motif horizontally, turn the stitch
width knob - to move right turn knob clockwise
- to move left turn knob counter clockwise
™ to move the motif vertically, turn the stitch
length knob - to move up, turn knob counter
clockwise - to move down, turn knob clockwise
• in the purple knob icon the alteration is
displayed in 1/10 millimeter (mm)
™ to move the motif diagonally turn the stitch
width and length knob (the number in both
purple knob icon is the same)
™ to re-center the motif touch the purple knob
icon or touch «Move Motif» again
™ touch «Move Motif» twice and a duplicated
motif is centered
™ touch symbol
• the purple knob icon for operating the stitch
width knob appears
™ to rotate the motif clockwise, turn stitch width
knob clockwise
™ to rotate the motif counter clockwise, turn the
stitch width knob counter clockwise
• display of the position in degrees (°)
™ to reactivate the default setting (0°/360°) touch
the purple knob icon
™ touch «rotate motif» several times and rotate
motif clockwise in 90° steps
(0°/90°/180°/270°/360°)
Rescale Motif Height or Width
™ touch symbol
• the purple knob icons for operating the stitch
width and length knob appear
™ to adjust the width of the motif (horizontally),
turn stitch width knob clockwise to increase
width and counter clockwise to decrease width
™ to adjust the height of the motif (vertically), turn
stitch length knob clockwise to increase height
and counter clockwise to decrease height
• display of the adjustment in percent (%)
™ to reactivate the default setting (100%) of the
motif touch the purple knob icon
Rescale Motif Proportionally
™ touch symbol
• the purple knob icon for operating the stitch
width knob appears
™ to enlarge the motif turn stitch width knob
clockwise
™ to reduce the motif turn stitch width knob
counter clockwise
• display of the alteration in percent (%)
™ to reactivate the default setting (100%) of the
motif touch the purple knob icon
Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)
™ touch symbol
• the motif will be mirrored vertically
(left/right)
Vertical Mirror Image
(up/down)
™touch symbol
• the motif will be mirrored horizontally
(up/down)
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
201
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 202
Motif Properties
Letter Manipulation
with the Motif Properties function the following
is possible:
• altering the stitch density of stitch types
• Pull Compensation: adjusting excessive
spacing/overlap of motif
• Run Length: altering outline length
™ touch symbol
• a special display appears
•
™ touch symbol
• a special display appears
™ to insert lettering touch the Text bar
• a screen with a keyboard appears
™ to change the alphabet type scroll next to the
Alphabet symbol
• the alphabet type changes in the display
™ to alter lettering size scroll with arrows next to
the Height box
™ alter stitch density (satin stitch, step stitch,
• alteration is shown in milimeter (mm)
decorative stitch fills (Fancy Fill))
™ to change the baseline type of lettering touch the
desired on-screen button
• touching «+» increases the stitch density
• touching «–» reduces the stitch density
• horizontal baseline
• display of the alteration in percent (%)
• circle counter clockwise produces lettering below
™ adjusting Pull Compensation
the curved baseline (three different forms of
arched lettering are possible, the larger the green
• touching «+» increases the Pull Compensation
circle the less the arch)
value to decrease excessive spacing between
objects and/or outlines caused by the push and
• circle clockwise produces lettering above the
pull effect of fill stitches
curved baseline (three different forms of arched
lettering are possible, the larger the green circle
• touching «–» decreases the Pull Compensation
the less the arch)
value to eliminate excessive overlap of objects
and/or outlines caused by the push and pull
• vertical baseline
effect of fill stitches
™ use up or down arrows to change letter spacing
in mm steps between letters
• display of the alteration in 1/10 millimeter (mm)
™ altering Run Length (outline)
• lengthen Run Length by touching «+»
To Next Page - Edit 1
™ touch symbol
• shorten Run Length by touching «–»
™ confirm entry by touching «OK»
• Design Menu Edit 1 appears
• display of the alteration in 1/10 millimeter (mm)
Note:
The last activated function in Edit 2 (Move Motif, Rotate
Motif, Rescale Motif Height or Width and Rescale Motif
Proportionally) can still be changed when switching
back to Design Menu Edit 1.
202
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 203
Embroidery Menu (Ready)
Hoop Display
• display of the attached embroidery hoop
with stitch field dimensions in mm
In the Embroidery menu (Ready) the motif can be
embroidered and embroidery related alterations
made (e.g. adjusting thread tension, reducing
motor speed, etc.).
Hoop Relocator
• this function makes threading
easier if the thread has to be
changed when the needle is very
close to the left edge of the hoop
™ touch symbol
• the hoop moves horizontally to the
center, a message appears
™ rethread
™ touch «OK» and the message will
close
• the hoop moves back to the
previous position
™ touch the Quick Reverse button
• the embroidery computer continues to embroider
Motif Size
• display of the motif width and
height in millimeters (mm)
Color Information Bar
information on the current thread color:
• display of the current thread color
• position of the current thread color
(1st number)
• number (2nd number)
• color number of the selected thread brand
™ right and left arrow change the current thread
color
™ touch the Color Information bar
• the hoop moves to first stitch of current thread
color (a cursor icon appears in the Color
Information bar)
• the current (active) color can also be individually
embroidered by touching the Color Information
bar
•
Thread Tension (Alteration)
™ touch symbol
• the Thread Tension screen appears
• the Thread Tension can be altered as
desired
• the selected setting is visible in the
on-screen button
Embroidery Time
display in minutes of the total
embroidery time of the motif
selected
•
Embroidery Time
•
•
•
•
•
•
display of the total (and remaining) embroidery
time of the motifs on the upper bar
Number in upper bar:
the left number indicates how many stitches
there are in the active motif/motif combination
the right number indicates the total stitch count
of the active motif/motif combination
display of the embroidery time of the active
color in the lower bar
stitch time on both bars counts down as
embroidery progresses
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Displays
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
203
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 204
Design Menu Edit 1
™ touch symbol
• the screen changes from the
Embroidery menu (Ready) to the Design
Menu Edit 1
«?» (Help)
™ touch symbol and select a function
• the explanation for the selected
function appears
™ close with «ESC»
Embroidery Speed 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 4/4
™ touch symbol one or more times
• the desired speed will be selected
• the bar on the symbol shows the
alteration
• reduces or increases the Embroidery
Speed proportionally
™ touch the symbol longer and the
default speed (4/4) is set again
Bobbin Thread Length
• When the Bobbin Thread Length
runs low the embroidery computer
stops and the following message
appears: «Please check lower
thread»
• as long as the message is visible, the
lower thread control is turned off
and embroidering can continue
• if the message is closed with «OK»
the lower thread control is active
again
Single/Multi Color Motif
™ touch symbol
• if the symbol is active, the complete
motif will be embroidered in one color
(without stopping)
• if the symbol is inactive, the colors will
be embroidered individually
Embroidery Sequence Control
(i.e. thread breakage)
™ touch symbol
• the Information Area for operating the
stitch width knob appears
™ to check the embroidery sequence of
the motif in stages turn stitch width
knob
• the needle follows the embroidery
sequence in small steps
™ to follow the embroidery sequence
forwards, turn the stitch width knob
clockwise
™ to follow the embroidery sequence
backwards, turn the stitch width knob
counter clockwise
• the number in the Information Area
shows the stitch count of the
embroidery sequence
™to reactivate the default setting touch
the purple knob icon
Move Hoop
™ touch symbol
• the Information Areas for operating the
stitch width and stitch length knob
appear
• if the fabric of a large motif has to be
rehooped (e.g. lettering, border, etc.),
the hoop can be moved to the last
stitch of the already embroidered part
of the motif by turning the knobs
204
The Embroidery Computer – On-screen Functions and Display
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 205
Starting Embroidery With Quick
Reverse Button on Head Frame
™ touch Quick Reverse button on
head frame to start embroidery
™ to enter the Embroidery menu
directly from the Design menu
touch the Quick Reverse button
on head frame
Automatic Thread Cutter
• when a color finished
embroidering, upper and lower
threads areautomatically cut
External Functions
Stitch Width / Stitch Length Knobs
™ with different functions such as
Thread Tension, Alter Size, Rotate
Motif, etc. the external knobs are
used to work on the motifs
• an Information Area appears if the
knobs can be operated
Embroidery Mode/ Sewing Mode
Button
™ changing from Embroidery Mode
to Sewing Mode and vice versa
The Embroidery Computer – External Functions
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
205
s187-206_e
19.4.2004
16:30 Uhr
Seite 206
206
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 207
In General 208
Embroidery Threads 210
Embroidery Stabilizers 211
Hooping the Fabric 213
Important Embroidery
Information
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 208
Embroidery Test
™ always stitch an embroidery
test on a sample fabric. Adjust
color, thread quality, needle,
stitch density, tension, etc. to
suit the motif if necessary
™ for the test use the same
fabric and stabilizer that you
will use on the project
Choosing an Embroidery Motif
• simple motifs with a low stitch
count are suitable for
embroidery on fine fabric
•
large-scale, densely
embroidered motifs
(e.g. with multiple color and
embroidery direction changes)
are suitable for medium- and
heavyweight fabrics
In General
Different Stitch Types
Underlay Stitches
Underlay stitches are the foundation of a motif and are used to
stabilize the base fabric and hold it in shape. They also prevent the
covering stitches of the motif from sinking into the knit or the nap of
the fabric. They are accomplished automatically in the built-in
designs for artista 200 and in artista Design cards.
Fill Stitches
Satin Stitch
• this stitch sews a dense zig-zag so the thread covers the motif
• satin stitches are suitable for filling small and narrow areas. They
are not suitable for filling large areas, as long stitches are too loose
and do not cover the fabric properly. In addition there is the
danger that with too long stitches the threads could catch on
something which would damage the embroidery
Step Stitch
• a fill stitch with stitches of specified length sewn in rows used
primarily to fill large areas quickly
208
Important Embroidery Information – In General
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Scaling/Sizing Motifs
• motifs can be scaled/sized with
artista software either on the
embroidery computer or on
the PC
• to get good results, the motifs
should be scaled within the
limits of 75% to 150%
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 209
Fancy-Fill Stitches
•
•
to give areas a special effect
stitches that create a motif with an area to be filled
Outline Stitches
•
•
•
usually straight or satin stitches
used to define a specific area or areas
examples are: straight stitch, double run, triple run, satin
Jump Stitches
•
•
•
long stitches that skip over fabric after one part of the motif
finishes and the next begins
before and after the jump stitch securing stitches are sewn
jump stitches are trimmed before the next color starts to
embroider
Important Embroidery Information – In General
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
209
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 210
Embroidery Threads
One of the most important elements in successful
embroidery is the quality of the thread. We
strongly recommend that you purchase thread
from a reputable BERNINA dealer in order to avoid
irregularities, thread breakage, etc. which so often
occur with poor quality threads.
Embroidery is particularly effective if you use glossy
rayon or polyester embroidery threads as upper
threads. They are available in a wide range of
colors for beautiful embroidery.
Polyester Threads
Polyester with a brilliant sheen is a hard wearing
colorfast thread and has a high tensile strength. It
is suitable for all types of embroidery, especially
children’s clothing and items which will be washed
often or subject to much wear and tear.
Embroidery Threads
Rayon Threads
Rayon is a soft viscose fiber with a brilliant sheen
and suitable for fine, delicate embroidery, or items
that will not receive excessive wear and tear.
TIP
When sewing with metallic threads, we recommend
the use of the vertical spool pin and the
supplementary thread guide (optional accessory).
Metallic Wrapped Polyester Thread
Metallic thread is a light- to mediumweight thread
suitable for special effects in embroidery.
Preferably use with a Metafil 130/705 H-MET
needle or Organ needle of varying sizes.
Embroidery Needle
™ correct size thread must correspond with correct
size needle
™ replace needle regularly
•
for more information on Needles see pages 17-19
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Bobbin Threads
Bobbin-Fil (Special Bobbin Thread)
Bobbin-Fil is an especially soft and light polyester
thread suitable for bobbin thread. This special
bobbin thread ensures a steady thread tension and
an optimal intertwining of the upper and bobbin
thread.
Darning and Embroidery Thread
Fine mercerized cotton thread suitable for
embroidery (Mettler 60 weight suggested), which
is embroidered on cotton fabric.
TIP
Use white bobbin thread or match color with fabric.
210
Important Embroidery Information – Embroidery Threads
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 211
Tear-away Stabilizers
• similar to interfacing; tears like paper
• one or more layers can be used
• comes in different weights
™ for more stability, apply to the wrong side of the
fabric with temporary spray adhesive before
hooping
™ carefully tear away exessive stabilizer from the
back of the embroidery after stitching
• stabilizer will remain under larger embroidered
areas
Application:
• for woven fabrics
Cut-away Stabilizers
• one or more layers can be used
• comes in light- and heavyweight
™ for more stability, apply to the wrong side of the
fabric with temporary spray adhesive before
hooping
™ carefully cut away from the back of the
embroidery after stitching
• stabilizer will remain under larger embroidered
areas
Embroidery
Stabilizers
Application:
• for most fabrics, especially suited for knits
Iron-on Interfacing
™ must be preshrunk by soaking in warm water
• this is pressed (fused) to the wrong side of the
fabric
• iron-on interfacings are available in a variety of
weights and should be selected to suit the fabric
being used
• removable iron-on interfacing is also available
Application:
• to provide body and shape for fabrics onto
which motifs will be placed
• use in conjunction with appropriate stabilizer
Paper Backed Adhesive Stabilizer
™ place stabilizer in hoop, paper side up
™ use a pointed object (e.g. scissors) to score the
paper and remove it to reveal the self-adhesive
surface
™ position the piece of fabric to be embroidered
on the stabilizer
Application:
• intended for delicate fabrics such as jersey or
silk, or hard to hoop fabrics such as velvets
Note:
When using paper backed adhesive stabilizer
make sure that there is no adhesive residue
on needle, stitch plate and hook area.
Important Embroidery Information – Embroidery Stabilizers
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
211
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 212
Water Soluble Stabilizer for Fabric With a Pile
and Lace Embroidery
• soluble stabilizer looks like plastic wrap
• dissolve stabilizer in warm water when
embroidery is complete
• soluble stabilizers are ideal protection for fabrics
with a thick or looped pile such as toweling
™ place on top of toweling and high nap fabrics
backed by appropriate stabilizer for fabric and
motif
™ use spray adhesive to fix stabilizer if necessary
™ for fabric with a pile, reinforce with additional,
suitable stabilizer on the wrong side if necessary
™ for lace embroidery place one or two layers of
water soluble stabilizer in hoop (as the motif is
not embroidered on any fabric, only the thread
embroidered motif is left)
™ after dissolving lay the motif down flat and leave
to dry
™ soluble stabilizer can also be removed by gently
tearing it away when used as a topping on
non-washable fabrics like velvet
Application:
• ideal for toweling, velvet, bouclé knits, etc.
• ideal for fine, sheer fabrics such as organdy,
batiste, etc.
• recommended for use as a stabilizer with low
stitch count motifs
• use heavier water soluble stabilizer to stitch lace
motifs
Spray Starch for Additional Stiffening
• spray starch is ideal for stiffening fine, soft or
loosely woven fabrics
™ spray the area to be embroidered, leave to dry or
press gently with a warm iron
™ always use an additional stabilizer such as water
soluble stabilizer on the wrong side of the fabric
Application:
• ideal for fine, loosely woven fabrics, e.g. batiste,
fine linen, etc.
212
Important Embroidery Information – Embroidery Stabilizers
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 213
Centering
™ determine the center of the fabric to be
embroidered
™ mark with a fabric marker or chalk
A
B
C
Using the Embroidery Hoop
™ loosen the screw(s)
™ remove the inner hoop
• the arrows on both hoops should match
• the arrows on the medium, large and Mega
hoops are at the center front and on the right
hand side of the small hoop
Hooping the Fabric
Embroidery Template
• there is a template for each embroidery hoop,
the small hoop has two
• the embroidery surface is marked in 3/8” (1 cm)
squares
• the center and corners are marked with holes for
transferring marks to fabric
™ place the template in the inner hoop so that the
word BERNINA is at the front (by the arrows)
and can be read
• the template will engage automatically in the
inner hoop
• there are finger holes for removing the template
from the small and medium hoops, and special
attachment clips for the large and Mega hoop
templates
Important Embroidery Information – Hooping the Fabric
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
213
s207-214_e
19.4.2004
16:31 Uhr
Seite 214
Hooping the Fabric
™ place fabric on top of the outer hoop
™ place the marked center point in the center of
the template on inner hoop
• match the arrows of inner and outer hoops
™ place inner hoop on top of fabric and outer
hoop and press into place, loosening screws to
accommodate fabric. Tighten screws
™ remove template
214
Important Embroidery Information – Embroidery Stabilizers
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 215
Motifs 216
• Embroidering • Positioning
• Altering: mirroring, size
• Combining
Alphabets – Lettering 226
• In general • Combining lettering
Adjustments 232
• Motif colors
• Adjusting motifs
Applications 235
• Free arm embroidery • Lace
• Borders • Shadow Embroidery
Embroidery
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 216
In General
All motifs can be either embroidered directly or can
be combined with the different functions offered
by the embroidery computer.
Apart from combining designs, it is also possible to
rotate the motifs, to alter the stitch density, to
allocate another thread color, etc.
Motifs
Basic Information on Embroidering Motifs With no Alterations
Motif Information
Valuable information about the desired motif is available in the
Motif Selection menu:
™ touch the function «?» (Help) and select desired motif
in the opened special screen «Design Information», the
following information on the selected motif is available:
• Name
• Width
• Height
• Embroidery Time
• No. Stitches
• No. Colors
™ touch «Open»
• the motif appears in the Design Menu Edit 1
•
Select Hoop
The most appropriate (smallest possible) hoop is automatically
chosen for the selected embroidery motif:
• the motif is shown on the display in the center of the most
appropriate hoop
• «Select Hoop» also shows the most appropriate hoop
216
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 217
View Motif in Detail (Zoom)
A detailed viewing of the motif is possible with the Zoom
function:
™ touch symbol once
• displays the motif enlarged by one step (zoomed in)
™ touch symbol a second time
• displays the motif enlarged by a further step, in addition the
function «Scroll Zoomed Motif» appears
™ touch symbol «Scroll Zoomed Motif»
• the Information Areas for operating the stitch width and
length knob appear
™ detailed viewing of the individual parts: scroll zoomed motifs
horizontally or vertically by turning the appropriate knob
• stitch width scrolls right/left
• stitch length scrolls up/down
™ by touching symbol a third time, reverts motif back to original
size
Embroidering Motif
To change to the Embroidery menu (Ready) touch «OK» in
Design Menu Edit 1 or press the external Quick Reverse button
on head frame
™ embroider motif
•
for more information on Starting to Embroider see pages
196-197 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
TIP
Hoop Relocater
• this function makes threading easier when the
needle is very close to the left edge of the hoop
™ touch symbol and the hoop will move horizontally
to the center, which makes threading easier
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
217
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 218
Positioning Motif
Positioning Motif in Desired Location
By moving or rotating the motif can
be moved to another position within
the hoop.
Preparation
™ select desired motif from the
Selection menu
• the motif appears in the Design
Menu Edit 1
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to
change to Design Menu Edit 2
Note:
If the knobs are turned slowly the
motif can be moved step by step
(step length = 1/10mm).
Note:
If the knobs are turned slowly the
motif can be moved in 1° steps.
218
Move Motif
Move motif as desired:
™ touch symbol
• the Information Areas for operating the stitch width and
length knob appear
™ to move the motif horizontally turn the stitch width knob
™ turn stitch width knob to right to move motif to right
™ turn stitch width knob to left to move motif to left
• in the Information Area the alteration is displayed in 1/10 mm
™ to move the motif vertically turn the stitch length knob
™ turn stitch length knob clockwise (down) to move motif
downwards
™ turn stitch length knob counter clockwise (up) to move
motif up
• in the Information Area the alteration is displayed in 1/10 mm
™ to move the motif diagonally turn the stitch width and length
knob
• the motif is moved diagonally when the same number appears
in both Information Areas
™ to move the motif back to the middle touch the Information
Areas or touch «Move Motif» again
Rotate Motif
Rotate motif as desired:
™ touch symbol
• the Information Area for operating the stitch width knob
appears
™ to rotate the motif clockwise turn stitch width knob clockwise
• in the Information Area the position in shown in degrees (°)
™ to rotate the motif counter clockwise turn the stitch width
knob counter clockwise
• in the Information Area the position in shown in degrees (°)
™ to reactivate the default setting (0°/360°) touch the purple
knob icon
™ touch «rotate motif» several times and the motif is rotated
clockwise in 90° steps (0°/90°/180°/270°/360°)
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 219
Checking the Motif Position
With the functions «Check» and «Motif Center» the motif position can be
checked before embroidering.
Check
The function «Check» reads the attached hoop size and stitching area:
™ touch symbol
• the hoop size is read causing the hoop to move
™ «Check» then confirms placement by moving hoop to reflect stitching area
of selected motif
™ «Check» moves hoop 4 steps so that stitching area of selected motif can
be confirmed
• hoop moves to lower left corner
• hoop moves to lower right corner
• hoop moves to upper right corner
• hoop moves to upper left corner
™ confirm each position by touching «OK»
• if no hoop or a too small hoop was attached, an error message will appear
Checking Motif Center
™ touch symbol
• the exact center of the motif is indicated on the display
• the hoop will be moved until the needle is in the center of the motif
™ touch symbol again and on the display the first stitch of the motif will be
marked once more
Altering Motifs
Mirroring Motifs
Each motif can be mirrored left/right or up/down.
Preparation
™ select desired motif from the Selection menu
• motif appears in Design Menu Edit 1
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to change to Design Menu Edit 2
Mirroring Motifs Horizontally (left/right)
™ touch symbol «Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)»
• the motif will be mirrored horizontally
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
219
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 220
Mirroring Motifs Vertically (up/down)
™ touch symbol «Vertical Mirror Image (up/down)»
• the motif will be mirrored vertically
Mirroring Motifs Horizontally and Vertically
™ touch symbols «Horizontal Mirror Image (left/right)» and
«Vertical Mirror Image (up/down)»
• the motif will be mirrored horizontally and vertically
Calculating New Embroidery Data
After changing from Design Menu Edit 2 to Embroidery menu (Ready)
™ touch Recalculation to have best Quality - may be time
consuming!
™ touch Resizing for fastest calculation. Quality may be not the best
(only suitable for motifs which were altered between 90% and
120%).
• the spinning thread spool indicates that an altered motif is being
recalculated
• each alteration made will appear in the Embroidery menu (Ready)
TIP
Rotating mirrored motifs
A wonderful variety of
combinations are possible together
with the function «Rotate Motif».
•
220
TIP
Combining designs
If mirrored and unmirrored designs
are combined, particularly attractive
effects and borders can be designed.
for more information on Combining Motifs see pages 223-225 •••••••••••
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Note:
No operations are
possible during the
calculation process!
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 221
Altering Motif Size
Each motif can be proportionally enlarged or reduced as well as
rescaled horizontally or vertically.
Note:
To get good results, the motifs
should be scaled within the limits
of 75% to 150%.
Preparation
™ select desired motif from the Selection menu
• the motif appears in Design Menu Edit 1
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to change to Design Menu
Edit 2
Enlarging or Reducing Motif Proportionally
Note:
If the knobs are turned slowly
the motif size can be altered
in 1% steps.
Altering the motif as desired:
™ touch symbol
• the Information Area for operating the stitch width knob
appears
™ to enlarge the motif turn stitch width knob clockwise
™ to reduce the motif turn stitch width knob counter
clockwise
• in the Information Area the alteration is displayed
in percent (%)
™ to reactivate the default setting (100%) of the motif
touch the Information Area
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
221
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 222
Adjust the Motif Height or
Width
Note:
If the knobs are turned slowly
the motif size can be altered
in 1% steps.
Motifs can be widened or reduced
horizontally or lengthened and
reduced vertically as desired:
™ touch symbol
• the Information Areas for
operating the stitch width and
length knob appear
™ to adjust the width (widen or
reduce the motif horizontally) turn
stitch width knob clockwise to
widen or counter clockwise to
reduce motif
• in the Information Area the
adjustment is displayed in
percent (%)
™ to adjust the height (lengthen or
reduce the motif vertically) turn
stitch length knob clockwise to
enlarge or counter clockwise to
reduce motif
in the Information
Area the adjustment
is displayed in
percent (%)
™ to reactivate the
default setting
(100%) of the motif
touch the Information
Area
•
Display of the Motif Size
The motif width and height is displayed in millimeters (mm) on screen.
Selecting the Most Appropriate Hoop for Adjusted Motif Size
The most appropriate hoop should be chosen for the motif size:
™ touch «Select Hoop»
• a special screen appears with possible choices of hoops
• by selecting a hoop (Small, Middle, Large Oval or Mega) the
motif is shown in the appropriate hoop after the special screen
closes
Calculating New Embroidery Data
After changing from Design Menu Edit 2 to Embroidery menu
(Ready) the new embroidery data is recalculated according to the
changes made.
•
for more information on Calculating New Embroidery Data see page 220
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
222
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 223
Combining Motifs
Motifs can be combined as desired with the
embroidery computer to create completely new
designs. A combination can consist of several
identical motifs or of different ones. It is also
possible to combine motifs with lettering.
Application
• combining motif variations
• creating new designs
• embroidering borders
• creating logos, crests, badges, labels, etc.
Preparation
™ select desired motif from the Selection menu
• the motif appears in the Design Menu Edit 1
Creating Combinations
Adding Another Motif
With the function «Add Motif» another motif or letter
from the Selection menu is added to the existing one:
™ touch «Add Motif»
• Selection menu appears
™ select motif or letter of your choice from the
Selection menu
• the selected motif is shown in the Design Menu
Edit 1 slightly offset above the existing motif
•
for more information on Lettering see pages 226-231
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Duplicating Existing Motif
The duplicating function simplifies combining different
variations of the same motif:
™ touch «Duplicate»
• the active motif will be duplicated automatically and
displayed slightly offset above the other motif
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
223
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 224
Creating Motif Combination
With functions such as «Move Motif», «Rotate Motif» «Mirror Image», etc.
the motif combination can be created as desired.
Selecting Motif Within the Motif
Combination
™ touch the symbol «Retrieve» once
or more
• switches between different motifs
when combining designs
• active motif is shown in color
™ touch «Retrieve» until the desired
motif is activated
Note:
Depending on how
many times the
symbol was touched,
one motif or the
complete motif
combination is active.
Creating / Altering Motif Combination
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to change to Design
Menu Edit 2 and create combination by altering
the active motif (= in color):
™ with «Move Motif» move the motif to the desired
position
• in addition other alterations are possible:
scaling, rotating, mirroring, etc.
•
for more information on different Functions
see pages 198-205 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••
the screen displays all changes directly
™ to alter another motif of the motif combination,
activate the desired motif with «Retrieve»
™ alter selected motif as desired
•
Note:
With the function «Move Motif»
(touch twice) a duplicated motif
can be centered.
224
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Note:
If the indicated hoop offers too
little space, select a larger one
with the function «Select Hoop».
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 225
Corrections and Alterations in the Motif Combination
Inserting New Motif
• to add another motif or duplicate an existing motif
see «Creating Combinations»
Altering Motif
™ touch the symbol «Retrieve» in the Design Menu
Edit 1 or Edit 2 once or more until the desired
motif is activated (in color)
™ alter the activated motif in Design Menu Edit 2 as
desired
Deleting Motifs
™ touch the symbol «Retrieve» in the Design Menu
Edit 1 or Edit 2 once or more until the desired
motif is activated (in color)
™ touch «Delete» in Design Menu Edit 1 and the
activated motif will be automatically deleted
Selecting the Most Appropriate Hoop for Adjusted
Motif Size
The best embroidery results are achieved by selecting
the most appropriate hoop for the motif size.
•
for more information on Selecting the Most
Appropriate Hoop see pages 196/199 •••••••••
Calculating New Embroidery Data
After changing from Design Menu Edit 1 or Edit 2 to
Embroidery menu (Ready) the new embroidery data is
recalculated according to the changes made.
•
•
for more information on Calculating New
Embroidery Data see page 220 •••••••••••••••
for more information on Saving Motifs see
pages 240-242 •••••••••
Embroidery - Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
225
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:33 Uhr
Seite 226
Letters can be combined with other letters or
motifs and embroidered with the embroidery
computer. The artista 200 embroidery computer's
Design Menu Edit 2 offers a large variety of
alteration possibilities:
Apart from altering the letter size, the baseline
type amongst other things, can be altered. For
instance arched letters can be made from
horizontally arranged letters.
Application
• names, monograms and addresses
• words and text
• creating logos, crests, badges, labels, etc.
• labeling quilts (quilt labels)
Alphabets - Lettering
Combining Letters
™ select desired alphabet from the Selection menu
• a special screen with a keyboard appears
• the «ABC» on-screen button (upper case) is automatically active
• in the special screen there are different functions which take
you to the appropriate lettering:
• the «ABC» on-screen button changes to upper case
• the «abc/123» on-screen button changes to lower case and
numbers
• the «@#» and «å æ» on-screen button activates special
characters
™ select desired letters
™ spaces can be added by touching the blank space bar
• the letters appear in the Text bar
Note:
If your edited lettering does not
fit in the hoop, rotate lettering by
90º (a large number of letters can
fit into the lengthwise stitch area
of the hoop).
Should this not be of any help
then change size of lettering or
reduce number.
Correcting Letters
™ to delete individual letters touch the arrow on the right of the
Text bar
• letters are deleted from right to left
™ to delete letters touch the Text bar
• letters will be completely deleted (Text bar is empty)
Confirming Letters
™ confirm combined letters with «OK» and the letters appear in
the Design Menu Edit 1
Embroidering Letters With or Without Alterations
The combined letters are ready to be embroidered or can be
altered with the different functions as desired.
•
226
for more information on Embroidering With no Alterations see pages 196-197 (Basic Information
on Embroidering Motifs With no Alterations) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 227
Altering Lettering
The letters are altered in the Design
Menu Edit 2:
Rescaling the Letters Height
or Width
™ touch symbol and the Information
Areas for operating the stitch
width and length knob appear
™ to adjust the motif horizontally
turn stitch width knob
™ to adjust the motif vertically turn
stitch length knob
• in the Information Area the
adjustment is displayed in percent
™ to reactivate the default setting
(100%) of the motif touch the
Information Area
Mirroring Lettering
™ touch symbol «Horizontal Mirror
Image (left/right)» and the motif
will be mirrored horizontally
™ touch symbol «Vertical Mirror
Image (up/down)» and the motif
will be mirrored vertically
Enlarging or Reducing
Lettering Proportionally
™ touch symbol and the Information
Area for operating the stitch width
knob appears
™ to enlarge the motif turn stitch
width knob clockwise
™ to reduce the motif turn stitch
width knob counter clockwise
• in the Information Area the
alteration is displayed in percent
™ to reactivate the default setting
(100%) of the motif touch the
Information Area
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
227
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 228
Creating Arched Lettering
™ touch symbol and a special screen appears
™ select desired arched lettering style:
• lettering below the curved baseline
(lettering counter clockwise)
• lettering above the curved baseline
(lettering clockwise)
• three forms each of arched lettering are
possible (the larger the green circle the less the
arch)
™ confirm with «OK»
• the special screen closes and the lettering is
displayed, formed in the selected arch
Lettering With Vertical or Horizontal Baseline
™ touch symbol and a special screen appears
™ select vertical or horizontal baseline
™ confirm with «OK»
• the special screen closes and the lettering is
displayed, formed in the selected baseline
Moving Letters
• after altering the baseline it is possible that the
programmed text is no longer in the center of
the hoop
™ touch symbol twice to move text to the center
of the hoop
Altering Lettering Size With Direct Input
™ touch the Letter Manipulation button
™ height can be changed in mm steps for selected
lettering by using arrows at right end of Height
box
• up arrow increases lettering size
• down arrow decreases lettering size
Changing Letter Spacing
™ use up or down arrows to change spaces in mm
steps between letters
Changing Fonts
™ touch the Letter Manipulation button
™ new font can be selected for entered text
™ use up or down arrows at right end of Font bar
to change font style
228
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 229
Selecting the Most Appropriate Hoop for Adjusted Motif Size
The best embroidery results are achieved by selecting the most appropriate
hoop for the motif size.
•
for more information on Selecting the Most Appropriate Hoop
see pages 196/199 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Calculating New Embroidery Data
After changing from Design Menu Edit 2 to Embroidery menu (Ready) the
new embroidery data is recalculated according to the changes made.
•
for more information on Calculating New Embroidery Data see
page 220 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
for more information on Saving Altered Lettering see pages
240-242 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Combining Lettering
Letters (for example words) can be combined with other letters
or motifs.
Combining Different Words
The words (for example Nothing Sews Like A Bernina. Nothing.)
are put together by the line and positioned individually:
Putting Together the First Text Line
™ select desired alphabet type from the Selection menu
• a special screen with a keyboard appears
™ enter for example «Nothing Sews»
• select letters by using the Upper Case/Lower Case button
and touch space bar to insert spaces where needed
™ confirm combined letters with «OK» and the letters appear
in the Design Menu Edit 1
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to change to Design
Menu Edit 2
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
229
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 230
Positioning First Text Line
™ select large hoop (Large Oval) with the function «Hoop Select»
™ rotate text by 90° (more space for text in hoop) with the Rotate
Motif function
™ position text with the function «Move Motif»
Combining and Positioning Further Text Lines
™ select «Add Motif» in the Design Menu Edit 1
• further text lines will also be combined and positioned
individually as described above
™ to determine equal spacing between lines, pay attention to the
numbers in the purple knob icon function «Move Motif» when
positioning text lines
Combining Motifs and Lettering
After selecting a motif the lettering is added according to the
work at hand (e.g. text in a motif). Or the lettering is created
first and the motif added afterwards (e.g. embellished text).
Combining Example (Creating Text in an Ornament)
™ select desired motif in the embroidery computer
• the motif appears in the Design Menu Edit 1
™ select «Add Motif» in the Design Menu Edit 1
™ select desired alphabet type from the Selection menu
• a special screen with keyboard appears
™ enter text (e.g. «Flowers»)
™ select lettering using Upper Case/Lower Case button
™ confirm combined lettering with «OK» and the lettering is
displayed in the Design Menu Edit 1 slightly offset above the
motif (ornament)
230
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 231
Altering Text to Suit Motif
™ use the «To Next Page» symbol to change to Design Menu
Edit 2
™ position the text as desired with the function «Move Motif»
™ alter text size to suit motif with the functions «Rescale Motif
Proportionally» or «Rescale Motif Height or Width»
Calculating New Embroidery Data
After changing from Design Menu Edit 2 to Embroidery menu
(Ready) the new embroidery data is recalculated according to the
changes made.
•
for more information on Saving Lettering see
pages 240-242 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
for more information on Calculating New
Embroidery Data see page 220 •••••••••••••
Embroidery - Alphabets, Lettering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
231
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 232
Motif Colors
The motif colors can be changed
as well as embroidered in
different ways.
Preparation
™ select desired motif from the
Selection menu
• the motif is displayed in the
Design Menu Edit 1
Adjustments
Reallocating Motif Colors
™ touch the function «Color Number» in the Design Menu Edit 1 or
Edit 2
• the Color Motif display opens
• following information on color is available: display of current color,
current color position (first number), number of all colors (second
number) and color number of chosen thread brand
™ scroll with the arrows until the color to be changed appears
™ touch Color Information bar
• a special screen for changing the current thread color appears
™ to change the thread brand scroll with the arrows next to the color
brand, until the desired brand appears
™ to change the thread color scroll with the arrows next to the
thread color, until the desired color appears, then touch Color bar
• touched Color bar is active (highlighted in blue)
Note:
For a quick selection of a certain color number, use the
function «Color Selection by Number».
™ touch «OK» , selected thread color and changed thread brand are
displayed in the Color Information bar
232
Embroidery - Adjustments
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 233
Embroidering Motifs in One Color
™ touch the brush symbol in the Embroidery menu (Ready)
• brush symbol is activated (highlighted in blue)
• embroidery computer stops only when motif is complete
Embroidering Lettering in Multi Colors
•
•
•
•
•
•
lettering is embroidered in one color and the brush symbol is not
visible
to embroider each letter of a word or each word of a word
combination in a different color, each letter or word must be
programmed and placed separately
the embroidery computer stops after each letter or word, the
thread color can be changed
the Embroidery Time is displayed for each color
to embroider the complete lettering combination in one color,
touch the brush symbol now visible
for more information on Combining Motifs see page 223 •••••••
Embroidering Individual Color Sections and Manual
Adjustment of Color Sequence
special effects can be acquired according to the motif, only when
individual color sections are embroidered (e.g. embroider only the
outlines of the motif)
™ scroll Embroidery menu (Ready) for color sequence until desired
color area is displayed
™ to confirm touch the Color Information bar (the cursor symbol
appears). This positions the needle in the start of the color
sequence selected
™ embroider color (embroidery computer stops automatically at the
end of color)
•
Embroidery - Adjustments
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
233
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 234
Adjusting Motifs
Special fabrics (e.g. toweling, velvet, etc.), thinner or thicker threads
can influence the embroidery result. If the embroidery test is not
satisfactory, the motif can be adjusted accordingly with the Motif
Properties function in the Design Menu Edit 2:
™ touch Motif Properties function
• a special screen with the following functions appears:
• Satin Density: altering stitch density of satin stitch
• Step Density: altering stitch density of step stitch
• Fancy Density: altering stitch density of Fancy-Fill
• Pull Compensation: adjusting excessive spacing/overlap of motif
• Run Length: altering outline length
Altering Stitch Density
™ determining stitch type: satin stitch, step stitch or decorative
stitches (Fancy-Fill)
™ increase desired stitch density by touching «+»
™ reduce desired stitch density by touching «-»
™ confirm entry by touching «OK»
• the spinning spool shows that the new motif is being recalculated
• the spinning spool disappears and the Design Menu Edit 2 reappears
•
for more information on Stitch Types see pages 208-209 ••••••••
Adjusting Pull Compensation
is used for example when the outline is not correct or the motif is
distorted
™ touching «+» increases the Pull Compensation value to decrease
excessive spacing between objects and/or outlines caused by the
push and pull effect of fill stitches
™ touching «-» decreases the Pull Compensation value to eliminate
excessive overlap of objects and/or outlines caused by the push and
pull effect of fill stitches
™ confirm entry by touching «OK»
• the spinning spool shows that the new motif is being recalculated
• the spinning spool disappears and the Design Menu Edit 2 reappears
•
Altering Run Length (Outline)
™ lengthen Run Length by touching «+»
™ shorten Run Length by touching «-»
™ confirm entry by touching «OK»
• the spinning spool shows that the new motif is being recalculated
• the spinning spool disappears and the Design Menu Edit 2 reappears
234
Embroidery - Adjustments
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 235
Free Arm Embroidery
Free arm embroidery is suitable for
lettering and small motifs (not larger
than 72x50mm).
Application
• embroidering closed items such as
sleeves, trousers, socks, etc.
• embroidering tubular items
•
for more information on Attaching
Adapter see page 192 •••••••••
Preparation
™ insert the adapter between the
sewing computer and the embroidery
module
Applications
Selecting Motif
™ select motif, stitching field of small hoop is 72x50 mm
™ rescale motif if necessary
™ check motif size with the function «?» (Help) from the
Selection menu if necessary
Note:
Not only small motifs are suitable
for free arm embroidery, but also
lettering and letter combinations.
™ select motif or letter
• the desired motif is displayed in the small hoop in
Design Menu Edit 1
™ alter motif or lettering if desired
™ when altering pay attention that maximum size does
not exceed 72x50 mm
Embroidering
™ when changing from Design Menu Edit 1 or Edit 2 to
Embroidery menu (Ready) the «adapter recognition»
takes place
• the embroidery computer recognizes that the adapter
as well as the small hoop are attached
™ embroider motif
Embroidery - Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
235
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 236
Embroidering Lace
•
•
lace motifs can be embroidered directly onto
fabric. For a true lace effect, however,
embroider the motif on water soluble stabilizer,
and then use it as lace
use fine thread for fine embroidery. Use thick
thread for crochet style effects
Embroidering
™ place two or three layers of water soluble
stabilizer in embroidery hoop (depending on
thickness of stabilizer)
™ embroider motif
™ rinse stabilizer away and place lace flat on paper
towels to dry
Note:
In the two lace motifs already programmed in
the embroidery computer, only the Heart is
suitable for the technique described above.
TIP
For lace motifs (e.g. Lace Border) place a piece of
organza, netting or tulle underneath water soluble
stabilizer when using one layer, and in between
when using two layers. Trim excess organza or tulle
closely along motif after rinsing and drying.
236
Embroidery - Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 237
Embroidering Borders
•
•
embroidered borders can be made either from several small
motifs or from long rows of aligned motifs
borders are perfect for decorative embellishment of table and
bedlinen, drapery and skirt hems, etc.
Preparation
™ use basting stitch (stitch No. 21) on sewing computer or an air
or water soluble marker (test first on fabric remnant) to mark
the center of the border
™ sub-divide border: measure length of the whole border as well
as of one single motif or repeat (the size of one motif is
displayed on the embroidery computer)
™ divide the whole length of border by the length of one motif
or repeat to get the number of motifs or repeats that can be
stitched on the border
the remaining length is the distance between the individual
motifs (divide length by one motif less than calculated,
e.g. 8 motifs or repeats: divide total length by 7)
• for a wider distance between the individual motifs, stitch
fewer motifs
™ mark individual motif center
•
•
in continuous motifs, the end point of one motif is often the
start point of the next one, so the positioning of the
individual motifs is done automatically
Embroidering
™ use template to place fabric in hoop (use center point and
marked center line as a guide)
™ embroider motif, unhoop fabric and rehoop at next mark
TIP
Positioning motifs
Use BERNINA's software to print motif in original
size for use as a template. Use print to arrange and
place motif directly on fabric (mark center or start
point of design).
Alternatively, use a scrap of original fabric to
embroider motif. Use motif instead of print for
placements.
TIP
Checking first stitch before completing
embroidery
Touch the Color Information bar in Embroidery
menu (Ready) to move the hoop to first stitch of
current thread color (a cursor symbol appears in
the Color Information bar).
TIP
Embroidery Mega-Hoop (special accessory)
Use the embroidery Mega-Hoop for particularly
easy embroidering of borders: fabric need not be
hooped as often as when using normal hoops.
Embroidery - Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
237
s215-238_e
19.4.2004
16:34 Uhr
Seite 238
Shadow Embroidery
A shadow effect is acquired if the same
embroidered lettering or word in another color is
placed slightly offset on top of an already
embroidered lettering or word.
Creating Lettering
™ create lettering
•
for more information on Lettering
see page 226 •••••••••••••••••
•
for more information on Allocating
Motif Colors see page 232 •••••
Reducing Stitch Density
• since the lettering is embroidered on top of each
other, reduce the stitch density to obtain best
possible embroidery results
™ select Motif Properties function in Design Menu
Edit 2
• a special screen with stitch types altering
applications appears
™ reduce stitch density of lettering stitch by
touching «-» and confirm with «OK»
• according to the amount of reduction,
embroidered lettering appears more airy
Duplicating Lettering
™ copy lettering with the function «Duplicate» in
Design Menu Edit 1
• the alteration of the stitch density remains in the
lettering copy
Moving Copied Lettering
™ move lettering copy to the desired position in
Design Menu Edit 2
• the created lettering shadow can appear
smaller or lager according to how the copied
lettering was moved
Allocating Motif Colors
™ allocate the desired lettering colors in the Design
Menu Edit 1 or Edit 2
Embroidering Lettering With Shadow
™ embroider lettering
TIP
For good embroidery results
Reduce embroidery speed according to stitch density
if necessary.
238
Embroidery - Applications
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 239
Saving Motifs 240
• Saving to the embroidery computer
• Saving on Personal design card
• Overwriting motifs
Deleting Saved Motifs 243
• Deleting one saved motif
• Deleting all saved motifs
artista
Embroidery
200
Embroidery
artista
artista
artista
200
Embroidery
200
Embroidery
200
200
200
200
200
artista
artista
artista
artista
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
200
200
200
200
artista
artista
artista
artista
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
200
200
200
200
BERNINA
BERNINA
artista
artista
artista
artista
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
Embroidery
BERNINA
BERNINA
Saving and Deleting
Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 240
In General
Motifs from the embroidery computer, personal
design cards, CD-ROMs or the myartista Portal, as
well as motifs created in the BERNINA artista
software, can be combined, rearranged, and
altered in different ways, then saved.
Motifs can either be saved to the embroidery
computer or on a personal design card.
Open desired motif from embroidery computer,
personal design card or peripheral source.
Alter or combine motif if desired.
The embroidery computer has a memory system,
i.e. both the sewing stitch combinations and
embroidery «My Designs» are saved in this system.
Since the memory space is not sub-divided into
fixed spaces, any desired number of motifs can be
stored as long as enough free memory is still
available. If there is not enough memory space,
other motifs and/or stitch information must first
be deleted.
Saving Motifs
Saving to the Embroidery Computer
Note:
In a saved stitch combination, individual
stitches can be altered after being selected.
Note:
Motifs which have been altered in terms of
size, stitch density, etc. and saved, will be
regarded as a new motif when subsequently
selected. (That is why all percentages say
100%, and the original alteration(s) is/are no
longer visible.)
™ open desired motif from embroidery computer, personal
design card or peripheral source
™ alter or combine motif if desired
™ touch «Save» in the Design Menu Edit 1
motif to be saved is displayed as «untitled» on left of screen
the Embroidery Computer button from the Selection menu
is activated
• the folder My Designs will open automatically
• the System Memory Capacity (Free Capacity) is shown in
percentage (%) in a bar above the folders
™ select motif to be saved
•
•
240
Saving and Deleting Motifs – Saving Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 241
• screen with keyboard appears
™ name the motif folder
™ touch «OK»
• the motif is now saved under this name in the
My Designs folder (in alphabetical order)
Saving to a Personal Design Card
•
personal design cards are available as optional
accessories from your BERNINA dealer
™ open desired motif from embroidery computer,
personal design card or peripheral source
™ alter or combine motif if desired
™ touch «Save» in the Design Menu Edit 1
•
for more information on Embroidery Cards see
page 255 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
motif to be saved is displayed as «untitled» on
left side of screen
™ insert personal design card
™ select Design Card button from the Selection
menu
™ the System Memory Capacity (Free Capacity) is
shown in percentage (%) in a bar above the
folders
™ select the motif to be saved
•
• screen with keyboard appears
™ enter name of motif
™ touch «OK»
• motif is now saved on personal design card in
alphabetical order with this name
Saving and Deleting Motifs – Saving Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
241
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 242
Overwriting Motifs
motifs saved in «My Designs» or on a personal
design card can be directly overwritten with a
new motif
™ open desired motif from embroidery computer,
personal design card or peripheral source
™ alter or combine motif if desired
™ touch «Save» in the Design Menu Edit 1
•
motif to be saved is displayed as «untitled» on
left of screen
™ select Design Card button (personal design card
inserted) or Embroidery Computer button from
the Selection menu
™ touch the motif you wish to overwrite
•
a message appears asking «Do you want to
overwrite 3 quilts.ART?»
™ touch «Yes» to confirm
™ select the motif to be saved
™ the motif is now saved with the name of the
overwritten one
•
242
Saving and Deleting Motifs – Saving Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 243
Deleting a Saved Motif
™ select Design Card button (personal design card inserted) or
Embroidery Computer button from the Selection menu,
as well as appropriate folder
™ touch the «?» (Help) button in the motif overview
™ select appropriate motif
Deleting Saved Motifs
a special screen opens which, in addition to information on
the motif selected, displays the Delete button at the bottom
left
™ touch «Delete»
•
• special screen opens
™ touch «I want to delete this design»
• message «Do you really want to delete this design?» appears
™ confirm with «Yes»
• motif is deleted
Note:
If factory set embroidery motifs are deleted or overwritten,
they can be restored by downloading the enclosed CD-ROM
onto the embroidery computer.
Saving and Deleting Motifs – Deleting Saved Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
243
s239-s244_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 244
Deleting All Saved Motifs
it is possible to delete the content of a personal design card,
or a folder that has been saved on the embroidery computer
all at once
™ to delete the content of a personal design card, activate
Design Card (personal design card inserted) in the menu
™ to delete the content of a folder in the embroidery computer,
select Embroidery Computer in the menu, then the
appropriate folder (Alphabets, Motif, My Designs)
•
™ touch the «?» (Help) button
™ select any desired motif
a special screen opens which, in addition to information on
the motif selected, displays the Delete button at the bottom
left
™ touch «Delete»
•
• special screen opens
™ touch «I want to delete ALL designs»
message «Do you really want to delete all designs in the
folder/personal design card?» appears
™ confirm with «Yes»
• all motifs which were in the appropriate folder or on the
personal design card are now deleted
•
244
Saving and Deleting Motifs – Deleting Saved Motifs
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 245
Thread Breakage While
Embroidering 246
Trouble Shooting 247
• Prevention and remedy of failures
• Messages
Embroidery Support
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 246
It is possible that the upper or lower thread may run out or
break while embroidering. In this case the embroidery computer
stops automatically provided that the upper and lower thread
sensors are activated.
•
how to activate Upper and Lower Thread Sensors in Setup
see page 167 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Upper Thread Breaks
• the embroidery computer stops automatically when the upper
thread runs out or has broken
• a message appears on the screen
™ check upper thread and rethread
™ touch «OK» to go back to the Embroidery screen
Thread Breakage While
Embroidering
Lower Thread Runs Out
• the embroidery computer stops automatically when the lower
thread runs out
• a message appears on the screen
™ check lower thread and refill if necessary
™ touch «OK» to go back to the Embroidery screen
Embroidery Sequence Control for Thread Breakage
• an Information Area for the use of the stitch width knob
appears
™ turn the stitch width knob counter clockwise (or clockwise)
to move the embroidery hoop backwards (or forwards) in the
embroidery sequence
™ turn the stitch width knob slowly to move the hoop stitch by
stitch
™ go back stitch by stitch to a position several stitches before
thread breakage occurred to resume stitching
Resuming Embroidery
™ press foot control or Quick Reverse button on head frame to
resume stitching
• Embroidery screen reappears again
™ complete motif
246
Embroidery support – Thread Breakage While Embroidering
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 247
Prevention and Remedy of Failures
Note the following advice to recognize the causes of most of the operation failures in the
embroidery computer that might occur.
Check First Whether:
• upper and lower threads are threaded correctly
• the needle is inserted correctly - flat part of the
shank to the back
• the needle is the correct size (see Needle/Thread
Chart on pages 17-19)
• the embroidery computer is clean - remove any
thread lint
• the hook race is clean
• bits of thread are trapped between the tension
disks and under the bobbin case spring
Upper Thread Breaks
• upper thread tension is too tight
• use of low quality needle. It is best to buy
needles in a BERNINA store
• needle has been inserted incorrectly. The flat
part of the shank must be to the back
• needle is blunt or bent
• use of poor quality thread, thread with knots,
thread too old or dried out
• use appropriate spool disc
• use net for even unwinding of thread (pull over
upper thread spool)
• stitch plate hole or hook tip is damaged: take
the embroidery computer to an authorized
BERNINA dealer
• reduce embroidery speed
Lower Thread Breaks
• lower thread tension is too tight
• lower thread is trapped in the embroidery
bobbin case. Replace bobbin
• needle is blunt or bent
• the stitch plate hole has been damaged by the
needle. It must be polished by a BERNINA
Technician
Unsatisfactory Stitch Formation
• remnants of thread between tension disks: pull
folded thin fabric (use the fold, not an outer
edge) back and forth between the tension disks
to clean the left and right side of the thread
tension
• remove any remnants of thread from under the
bobbin case spring
• adjust thread tension
• used wrong or no stabilizer at all
• incorrectly threaded - check upper and lower
thread
• when embroidering, thread pigtail tensioner with
lower thread
Trouble Shooting
Titel 1
•
•
use appropriate spool disc
clean and oil hook (use original oiler only. See
Cleaning and Lubricating on page 179)
Embroidery Computer Fails to Run or Runs
Slowly
• plug not fully inserted
• power switch in «0» (off) position
• embroidery computer has been standing in a
cold room
Defective Sewing Light
• take the embroidery computer to an authorized
BERNINA dealer
Lower Thread Indicator Sensor
bobbin cover is not closed
• not activated in the Setup Program
• remove any thread lint and remnants
from the bobbin case
•
Skipped Stitches
• incorrect needle used. Use only 130/705H needle
system
• needle is bent or blunt or not correctly inserted.
Push all the way to the top when inserting
• low quality, badly polished needle used
Upper Thread Indicator Sensor
not activated in the Setup Program
•
Needle Breaks
• needle clamp screw is too loose
• defective stitch plate
Embroidery Support – Trouble Shooting
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
247
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 248
Messages
In special cases messages may appear on the
screen. They serve as a reminder, warning, or
confirmation of selected applications and
functions.
•
Possible Messages regarding the sewing
computer see page 181 •••••••••••
Below, the embroidery module messages are listed,
together with the appropriate action to be taken in
each case.
Message
248
•
The embroidery computer cannot change to sewing. Please
finish the layer and press the «Edit» button to return to
previous screen. You may now safely change to sewing.
•
Hoop cannot be parked because the presser foot or needle is
in the wrong position.
•
Please lower the feed dog.
•
Please use a larger embroidery hoop.
•
Card exchange was not accepted. Possible loss of data!
Please refer to your manual before exchanging cards.
•
The point lies outside the embroidery area.
•
The next stitch lies outside the embroidery area. Please rehoop
fabric and relocate the design.
•
Please reposition the Mega-Hoop to Upper (1) position,
raise presser foot and press OK to start calibration.
•
Please reposition the Mega-Hoop to Middle (2) position,
raise presser foot and press OK to start calibration.
•
Please reposition the Mega-Hoop to Lower (3) position,
raise presser foot and press OK to start calibration.
•
Please change the needle to the highest position.
•
Please attach embroidery module.
•
Embroidery module communication working properly.
•
Embroidery module communication NOT working!
•
Embroidery design card working properly.
•
Embroidery design card NOT working.
•
You have selected embroidery. Please attach the embroidery
module and foot No. 15, raise the presser foot and lower the
feed dog. Press OK to start module detection, the Module
Arm will MOVE.
Embroidery Support – Messages
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 249
Message
•
The attached hoop is too small for this design. Please press
«Edit» button to return to previous screen, change hoop and
press «OK» for hoop detection.
•
You have changed the hoop attachment (from «normal» to
«free-arm» or vice versa). Please press «check» button to start
module calibration.
•
ADX: Please switch to Embroidery Mode to stitch out the motif.
•
Not enough free Space to save Design!
•
Design does not fit into hoop!
•
Bottom Left Position lies outside of hoop!
•
Bottom Left Position.
•
Bottom Right Position lies outside of hoop!
•
Bottom Right Position.
•
Top Right Position lies outside of hoop!
•
Top Right Position.
•
Top Left Position lies outside of hoop!
•
Top Left Position.
•
Design Successfully Finished.
•
Please switch feed dog to sewing position.
•
Please check the upper thread.
•
Bobbin winder is on.
•
Please check the lower thread.
•
Please lower presser foot.
•
Please raise the presser foot.
•
For easier threading it is recommended that the presser foot is
lowered.
•
For threading it is recommended that the needle be in the
highest position.
•
The sewing/embroidery computer is not functioning correctly.
Please contact your BERNINA dealer.
•
During start-up an error occurred. Please restart the
sewing/embroidery computer. If the problem persists please
contact your BERNINA dealer.
Embroidery Support – Messages
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
249
s245-250_e
19.4.2004
16:42 Uhr
Seite 250
Message
250
•
The downloaded data is invalid. Please try later.
•
The BERNINA Modem cannot be identified. Please insert the
Modem and try again.
•
Cannot dial, please check the phone line and then dial
number.
•
The authentication for the provider failed. Please check the
username and the password.
•
The communication with the provider was interrupted. Please
try later or use another provider.
•
An unknown error occurred with the Modem. Please try
again.
•
You cannot save or delete files on the myartista Portal.
•
A problem occurred in communicating with the myartista
Portal. Please try again.
•
To keep your sewing/embroidery computer performing at its
best, it’s time to complete the following tasks. Remove thread
and lint from beneath the stitch plate, as well as from the
feed dog area. These instructions can be found on page 179
of the manual.
•
It’s time for your regular service check. Please contact your
BERNINA dealer for an appointment.
•
You have opted not to take your sewing/embroidery computer
to your BERNINA dealer for its service check. This message will
not appear until it’s time for the next regular service.
•
CD-ROM NOT working!
•
Main Motor failed. Please check hook system.
Embroidery Support – Messages
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 251
Peripherals 252
• BERNINA computer system
• Connecting peripherals
Accessories 254
• Suitcase system
• Embroidery Mega-Hoop
• Embroidery cards
• BERNINA artista software
Peripherals and
Accessories
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 252
BERNINA Computer System
Connect peripherals (special accessories) to turn your artista 200 embroidery computer into an
embroidery computer system, and take your hobby to unlimited heights of creativity.
In addition to a direct connection with the myartista Portal (information source), which takes you to the
Portal site especially created for the embroidery computer, it is also possible, for instance, to get extra
motifs from a BERNINA CD-ROM.
Ask your BERNINA dealer for more information.
Peripherals
The following external devices can be connected
to the artista 200 embroidery computer:
• BERNINA Modem
• BERNINA CD-ROM drive
Note:
All peripherals are special accessories,
depending on country. Ask your BERNINA
dealer for information!
External Devices
Modem
(for access to myartista Portal)
The BERNINA Modem enables direct access to the myartista
Portal (information source) where the special Portal pages,
programmed for the embroidery computer alone, can be called
up onto the artista 200 screen.
In the myartista Portal you will find various embroidery designs
categorized by hoop size which can be downloaded to the
embroidery computer.
Making a connection
connect Modem
touch «Portal»
confirm message about connecting with «Yes»
when the connection to the Provider is made, then confirm the
message that appears with «OK»
select the desired hoop from the now opened screen
the embroidery motif overview for the corresponding hoop size
appears
The content of the myartista Portal is continuously updated.
252
Peripherals and Accessories – External Devices
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 253
External CD-ROM drive
Using the external BERNINA CD-ROM drive, BERNINA embroidery
CD-ROMs can be opened directly on the embroidery computer.
Connect CD-ROM drive and insert a BERNINA CD-ROM.
™ touch «CD-ROM» in the Embroidery Mode
• the motifs from the CD-ROM are displayed in color on the
screen
™ touch the motif selected
Note:
When combining designs from different
CD-ROM’s, each motif has to be saved first
to the embroidery computer (see page 240).
The individual, saved motifs may then be
combined.
Connecting Peripherals (Embroidery Computer Compatible)
1
Connecting Peripherals
™ plug external device into socket provided on the
right hand side of embroidery computer (look
for symbol)
2
3
Note:
The external devices include user
instructions!
1 BERNINA Modem
BERNINA Embroidery card
2 BERNINA CD-ROM drive
Caution:
You must only use BERNINA external devices
with the BERNINA artista 200 embroidery
computer.
3 PC connection
Ask your BERNINA dealer!
Peripherals and Accessories – External Devices
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
253
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 254
BERNINA offers a variety of extras (special accessories: presser foot,
magnifying lens, multi spool holder, Mega-Hoop, embroidery design
cards) to go with the sewing and embroidery system artista 200, for
new and unlimited opportunities.
Ask your BERNINA dealer for more information.
Suitcase System
Thanks to the suitcase system with integrated wheels especially
developed for the sewing and embroidery computer, you will be able
to carry the latter with particular ease and elegance.
The case houses both standard and special accessories in
conveniently arranged compartments and bags.
Note:
The suitcase system protects the
computers from dust and dirt,
as well as humidity, for short
distances.
Accessories
Suitcase for Sewing Computer
™ simply remove bags and compartments to place the sewing
computer in the suitcase for storage (screen faces front)
™ load compartments and bags with standard accessories and replace
™ the bags provide space for additional special accessories
Suitcase for Embroidery Computer
™ simply remove bags and compartments to place the embroidery
module in the suitcase for storage (embroidery arm faces front)
™ load compartments and bags with standard accessories and replace
™ the bags provide space for additional special accessories
Caution:
When travelling by plane, coach or train, the suitcase
system must be transported as carry-on luggage only,
or «fragile goods»! The suitcase system must not be
transported as normal luggage!
254
Peripherals and Accessories – Accessories
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 255
Embroidery Mega-Hoop
Use the embroidery Mega-Hoop to stitch extra large motifs, large
design combinations, or long borders with ease.
With the Mega-Hoop three embroidery positions are possible. If
the Mega-Hoop has been repositioned, the embroidery computer
stops and a message indicates, to which embroidery position
(1, 2 or 3) the Mega-Hoop has to be moved.
Extra large motifs for use with the Mega-Hoop can, for example,
be downloaded from myartista Portal if your embroidery
computer is connected to the BERNINA Modem; or use motifs
from one of the BERNINA CD-ROMs (external BERNINA CD-ROM
drive must be connected to the embroidery computer).
Note:
The embroidery Mega-Hoop includes user
instructions!
Embroidery Cards
1
In addition to the preprogrammed BERNINA embroidery cards
available as a supplement to the designs already in the
embroidery computer, there are «empty» personal design cards
available to save embroidery designs or embroidery design
combinations.
The preprogrammed BERNINA embroidery cards contain a
number of embroidery designs on a specific theme. The subject
areas are continually supplemented and extended.
With this embroidery computer also older preprogrammed
BERNINA embroidery cards can be used.
1 Embroidery card
Inserting Embroidery Cards
™ slide design card into the slot provided on the right hand side
of the embroidery computer (look for symbol)
• designs can now be opened and displayed on screen
Caution:
Do not remove embroidery cards
when the computer is in use!
Removing Embroidery Cards
™ touch Embroidery Card Removal button
• button extension appears
™ touch button again
• embroidery card appears in card inserting slot on embroidery
computer
™ remove embroidery card
Note:
When using older BERNINA
embroidery cards (e. g. artista 180)
please refer to the color chart
(enclosed with card) for color
details!
Peripherals and Accessories – Accessories
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
255
s251-256_e
19.4.2004
16:45 Uhr
Seite 256
BERNINA artista Embroidery Software
Use the BERNINA artista PC software to combine, extend, and
change existing motifs on a personal computer (PC). The
software even allows you to create motifs all on your own. The
whole design process lies in your hands: from first draft, to final
transformation into embroidery stitching, the choices are all
yours!
3
The finished designs you have created are transferred via a USB
connecting cable directly to the embroidery computer, where
you can embroider them. The USB connecting cable comes with
the embroidery computer.
Plugging USB Connecting Cable from the PC into the
Embroidery Computer
™ plug USB connecting cable into socket provided on the right
hand side of embroidery computer (look for symbol)
3 PC connection
Embroidery Design (PC) Saving Options
• on PC
• on artista 200 embroidery computer
• on a personal design card
Ask your BERNINA dealer for other accessories for
your embroidery computer!
Note:
The BERNINA artista embroidery
software includes user instructions!
256
Peripherals and Accessories – Accessories
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s257-259_e
19.4.2004
16:46 Uhr
Seite 257
Glossary
Add
• to add means to combine by addition, to join, to
increase
• adding a new motif
auto
• for example in connection with sewing buttonholes:
• if the length is preprogrammed «auto» appears, i.e.
the buttonhole is stitched in the programmed
length automatically (by itself)
auto/repeat
• to repeat means to redo, hence auto repeat redoing
something by itself
• keeping the external needle position button pressed
leads to rapid automatic moving of the needle
position (by itself)
Balance
• to balance a stitch or motif means to alter a stitch
or sideways motion stitch to correct distortions
Calibrate
• to calibrate, to gauge, to measure
• calibrating means determining measures, setting
the screen
Check
• to check, to examine, to inspect
• when embroidering, the computer checks which
embroidery hoop is mounted, and «travels» the
fabric to check on the position of the motif
CD-ROM
• abbreviation for Compact Disk – Read Only
Memory (no writing, just reading)
• a CD-ROM's content can be read but not changed
on the CD
• on the artista 200 sewing and embroidery
computer CD-ROMs can be read via BERNINA
CD-ROM reader
clr (clear)
• to clear, to delete
• functions or commands can be deleted and reset to
the original position
Edit
• to edit, to write, to publish, to process a text, to
prepare for printing
• motifs are edited in the Design Menu (Edit 1 or
Edit 2), for example mirrored, scaled, etc.)
ESC
• closing a function, going back to original position
(e.g. to original screen settings)
Fall
• autumn
• the artista 200 embroidery designs are divided into
the four seasons – spring, summer, fall and winter
Help
• help, to help, to assist
• a program that is built into the sewing and
embroidery computer which gives e.g. information
(help) on stitches, functions, etc.
History
• history, record, development
• artista 200 displays a maximum of 15 most recently
selected and sewn stitches in the «History» function
manual
• manually
• a manual buttonhole is sewn in four or six steps
(depending on the type of buttonhole). The sewer
manually changes the positions on screen.
Mega-Hoop
• mega means very large, hoop means frame
• extra large embroidery hoop for stitching very large
motifs or long borders
Memory
• memory, store
• programs and data are saved and prepared for
processing
• the memory of the sewing and embroidery
computer can be used to save e.g. stitch
combinations or motifs
Menu
• summary, overview, selection of functions
Duplicate
• to duplicate means to double, to copy, to multiply
(making exact copies)
• duplicating a motif means that the active motif is
copied exactly
Glossary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
257
s257-259_e
19.4.2004
16:46 Uhr
Seite 258
Modem
• acronym for «Modulator» and «Demodulator»
• a Modem is used to transfer data to the artista 200
sewing and embroidery computer via the phone
network
Ready
• prepared, waiting to begin
• «ready» in the Embroidery menu (Ready) means
that the motif can be stitched immediately
recording
• to record, to preserve, to tape
• the stitch counter records or programs the
number of stitches used
• the stitch counter records the stitched length of a
buttonhole
New
• new
• opening a new motif
OK
• all right, yes
• confirming the command entered or change that
has been made
Reset
• to set again, to put back, to restore
• a change made is undone, i.e. reset to the
original settings
PC
• Personal Computer
Peripheral
• device that is not part of the central unit of a
computer system
• artista 200 for example features a CD-ROM and/or
Modem as peripherals
scroll
• to browse
• if a comprehensive file (e.g. selection of stitches)
cannot be displayed in full, the «scroll» tool can be
used to display further sections on screen
sensor
• signal receiver, measuring sensor
pop-up
• pop-up menu («pops up» or opens suddenly)
• special screen that opens, listing entries from which
to select, when touching the arrow next to an entry
bar
Portal
• door, gate, entrance
• special information source for artista 200
• the Portal especially designed for artista 200 is
myartista Portal. On connecting the BERNINA
Modem and selecting the function «Portal» your
artista 200 sewing computer connects with
myartista Portal, from where you can e.g.
download motifs
Provider
• someone who offers communication services (e.g.
access to the Internet)
• the Provider opens access to the myartista Portal for
artista 200. There are various Providers. You are free
to choose any of them. Enter Provider name,
Provider number, user name and password to make
the connection
Pull Compensation
• adjusting excessive spacing/overlap of motif
• is used for example when the outline is not correct
or the motif is distorted
258
Setup
• to determine, to begin
• structure
• in the Setup Program you can for example
determine and adjust the factory settings to your
personal requirements
software
• generic term for programs (i.e. computer programs)
• as opposed to hardware, which is the term used to
describe any physical or tangible components of a
computer (e.g. the casing, motor, etc.)
Spring
• spring (the season)
• the artista 200 motifs are divided into the four
seasons spring, summer, fall and winter
Summer
• the artista 200 motifs are divided into the four
seasons spring, summer, fall and winter
touch screen
• sensor screen
• touch a button on screen rather than press a key on
the keyboard
Glossary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s257-259_e
19.4.2004
16:46 Uhr
Seite 259
Tutorial
• self-help program for learning about various sewing
and embroidery computer features
Update
• latest version
• updating the sewing and embroidery computer
software: installing a newer or the latest version, or
updating parts of a program
Upgrade
• to take to a higher level, to improve, to promote
• upgrading the sewing and embroidery computer
means improving or extending its functions
USB
• Universal Serial Bus
• the sewing and embroidery computer provides for
USB connections to plug in peripherals
(e.g. CD-ROM drive)
Windows CE
• CE stands for Consumer Electronic
• the operating system used with artista 200 sewing
and embroidery computers
Winter
• winter
• the artista 200 motifs are divided into the four
seasons spring, summer, fall and winter
Zoom
• to focus on, to enlarge, to rescale
Glossary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
259
s260-265_e
19.4.2004
16:52 Uhr
Seite 260
Practical Stitches
Buttonholes
16 Directions Sewing
4 Directions Sewing
Decorative Stitches 9mm / 40mm
260
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s260-265_e
19.4.2004
16:52 Uhr
Seite 261
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
261
s260-265_e
262
19.4.2004
16:52 Uhr
Seite 262
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s260-265_e
19.4.2004
16:52 Uhr
Seite 263
Zodiacs
Quilt Stitches
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
263
s260-265_e
19.4.2004
16:53 Uhr
Seite 264
Alphabets
264
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
s260-265_e
19.4.2004
16:53 Uhr
Seite 265
Stitch Summary – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
265
s266-270_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 266
Spring
Daffodils
160
Iris
171
137
51
Floral wreath
96
127
Length in mm
266
51
57
52
61
11
Width in mm
137
Butterfly
98
88
Little pansies
94
27
Embroidery time
in minutes
Embroidery Design Collection – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
37
12
s266-270_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 267
Summer
Little wild rose
62
58
14
Flowers with butterfly
61
127
13
White rose
196
Fuchsia
216
119
88
Lace border
52
134
65
Daisy
50
148
34
36
4
Embroidery Design Collection – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
267
s266-270_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 268
Fall
3 Quilts
49
140
153
23
140
Grape leaf
158
97
111
55
Mushrooms
121
7
Sunflower
268
Quiltoutline
61
13
Embroidery Design Collection – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
121
56
s266-270_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 269
Winter
Sprig of pine
178
105
Holly and bird
120
65
66
95
13
55
Lace heart
164
119
Royal fdl
46
Holly and heart
114
40
126
37
Embroidery Design Collection – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
269
s266-270_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 270
Alphabets
Alice
Font height: min. 8mm / max. 50mm
Blackboard
Font height: min. 8mm / max. 50mm
Cursive
Font height: min. 7mm / max. 60mm
Drifter
Font height: min. 6mm / max. 40mm
Lisa
Font height: min. 13mm / max. 75mm
London
Font height: min. 8mm / max. 50mm
Varsity block
Font height: min. 6mm / max. 35mm
270
Embroidery Design Collection – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
Childs Play
Font height: min. 13mm / max. 30mm
King Charles
Font height: min. 8mm / max. 50mm
Swiss block
Font height: min. 6mm / max. 60mm
s271-272_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 271
Index
A
Accessories 10, 189, 190
Accessory Box 10
Alphabets, Lettering 97–108,
226 –231
• Altering Lettering 202, 227, 228
• Combining Lettering 229, 230
• Combining Lettering 9 mm 100
• Combining Lettering and Functions
101, 102
• Combining Letters 226
• Lettering Information 99
• Monogram Size 31
• Monograms 103–108
• Summary 264, 265, 270
Altering Stitches 30
Altering Stitch Width/Length 23,
30
Altering the Needle Position 24
Appliqué 143, 144
Attaching Hoop 196
Attaching the Embroidery Module
191
B
Balance
• Buttonholes 113
• Practical and Decorative Stitches
177
• Sideways Motion Stitches 178
Bartack Program 71
Basting Stitch 49
BERNINA artista Embroidery Software 256
Blanket Stitches 145
Blind Hem 52
Bobbin Case (remove/insert) 13
Bringing up Lower Thread 15
Button Sew-on Program 132
Buttonholes 109–133
• Automatic Buttonhole Button
Measuring on Screen 117
• Automatic Buttonhole Standard
and Stretch 119, 120
• Automatic Round, Keyhole and
Hand-look Buttonhole 121, 122
• Balance 113
• Bound Buttonhole 129, 130
• Button Measuring 117
• Buttonhole Functions 111
• Buttonhole in Long Term Memory
118
• Corded Buttonholes 114, 115
• Cutting Buttonhole open 115
• Decorative Buttonholes 131
• Direct Entry Length 116
• General 111
• Important Buttonhole
Information 112
• Manual 4 or 6 Step Buttonhole
125, 126
Stitch Counter Buttonhole 123,
124
• Stitch Summary 110
• Straight Stitch Buttonhole 127,
128
•
C
CD-ROM Drive 185, 253
Change Motifs
• Adjust Motif Height or Width
201, 222
• Mirroring Motif 201, 219, 220
• Rescale Motif Proportionally 201,
221
Changing the Needle 15
Changing the Presser Foot 21
Cleaning and Maintenance 179
Combination Sub-divider 31, 102
Combining Motifs
• Adding Another Motif 200, 223
• Creating Motif Combination 200,
201, 224, 225
• Duplicating Existing Motif 200,
223
Combining Motifs and Lettering
230, 231
Connecting Peripherals 186, 253
Connecting Stitches 95
Connecting the Free Arm Adapter
192
Corded Scallops 88
Creative Consultant 175, 176
Cross Stitches 81
D
Darning Automatic 67
Darning Manual 68
Decorative Quilt Stitches 142
Decorative Stitches 73–96
• Combining Decorative Stitches and
Functions 77, 78
• Decorative Stitches 9 mm 76
• Decorative Stitches in the Combi
Mode 79, 80
• Important Decorative Sewing
Information 75
• Stitch Summary 74
Details
• Embroidery Module 188
• Sewing Computer 8, 9
Different Stitch Types
• Fancy-Fill 209
• Jump Stitches 209
• Outline Stitches 209
• Satin Stitch 208
• Straight Stitch 208
• Underlay stitches 208
16 Directional Sewing 94
4 Directional Sewing 96
Double Overlock Seam 55
E
Edgestitching 43, 44
Elastic Edges 66
Embroidering Borders 237
Embroidering Lace 236
Embroidering Motifs with no
Alterations 216, 217
Embroidery Bobbin Case 193
Embroidery Cards 255
Embroidery Design Collection
266–270
Embroidery Template 213
Embroidery Sequence Control
204, 246
Embroidery Stabilizers 211, 212
Embroidery Support 245, 246
Embroidery Threads 210
External Functions
• Altering Needle Position 28
• Automatic Thread Cutter 28, 205
• Clr (Clear) Button 28
• Creative Consultant 28
• Embroidery Mode / Sewing Mode
Button 205
• Favorite Function Button 28
• Pattern End 28
• Quick Reverse Button 28, 205
• Setup Button 28
• Stitch Width / Stitch Length Knobs
205
• Tutorial 28
Eyelet Programs 133
F
Fancy-Fill 209
Feed Dog
• Feed Dog and Fabric Feed 22
• Feed Dog up/down 21
• Sewing Corners 22
FHS (Free Hand System) 11
Flat Joining Seam 57
Fly Stitches 72
Free Arm Embroidery 235
Foot Control 11
Freehand Embroidery 70
Freehand Quilting 148
Functions and Displays
• Design Menu Edit 1 200, 201
• Design Menu Edit 2 201, 202
• Embroidery menu (Ready)
203, 204
• on-screen 198–204
Functions General 29
Functions Selecting 24
Functions Special 30–33
G
Gathering 63
Glossary 257–259
Index – artista 200
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN
271
s271-272_e
19.4.2004
16:50 Uhr
Seite 272
H
Height Compensating Tool 22
Heirloom Techniques 82–88
• Corded Scallops 88
• Hemstitching 83
• Pintucks 84–86
• Scallops Off the Edge 87
• Sewing Lace 82
Help Program 172
Hemstitches 83
Hems with Double Needle 60
History 33
Honeycomb Stitch 54, 62
Honeycomb Stitch Edges 54
Hooping the Fabric 213, 214
I
Important Safety Instructions 1, 2
Inserting the Bobbin 14
K
Keyhole buttonholes 121, 122
L
Long Stitch function 30, 40
M
Mega-Hoop 255
Menu Selection 26, 27
Messages 181, 182, 248–250
Modem 184, 185, 252
Monograms 103–108
• Combining Monogram Letters
Manually with Templates 104
• General Information 103
• Monogram Combinations with 16
Directional Sewing 105
• Monogram Size 1 104
• Monogram Size 2 and 3 107,
108
Motif Colors 200, 203, 232, 233
• Embroidering Individual Color
Sections 233
• Motifs in One Color 233
• Reallocating Motif Colors 232
Motif Information 216
Motif Properties 202, 234
• Adjusting Pull Compensation 234
• Altering Run Length (Outline) 234
• Altering Stitch Density 234
Motor Speed 32
Multifunction Button 31
myartista Portal 185, 252
N
Needle, Thread, Fabric 17
Needle Threader 15
Needle/Thread Combination 18
Needle Stop Adjustment 31
Needle System 18
Needle Table 19
O
Outline Stitches 209
272
P
Patches on Knits and Jersey 69
Patchwork, Appliqué and Quilting
137
Peripherals 184, 185, 252, 253
Personal Program 149–152
Piecing Stitch / Straight Stitch 140
Pintucks 84–86
Plugging USB Cable 256
Positioning Motif
• Move Motif 201, 218
• Positioning Motif 218, 219
• Rotate Motif 201, 218
Power Cable 11
Practical Stitches 35–72
• Adjusting Individual Practical
Stitches 38
• Applications 41–72
• Stitch Summary 36, 37
Practical Stitches in the Combi
Mode 79, 80
Preparing the Embroidery
Computer for Embroidery 193
Presser Foot Indicator 24, 30
Presser Foot Pressure 21
Presser Feet 20
Q
Quilt Stitches 135–148
• Applications 138–148
• Important Information 137
• Stitch Summary 136
R
Reinforced Edges 62
Replacing the Sewing Light 179
Ribbing Finish 61
Ribbing with Overlock Seams 59
S
Satin Stitch 143, 144, 208
Saving Altered Settings
Permanently 24, 25
Saving and Deleting Stitches and
Stitch Combinations / Motifs
153–158, 239–244
Scallops Off the Edge 87
Screen 12
Securing Function 32
Securing Stitch 42
Security Program 32
Selecting Embroidery Motif 194,
195
Selection Menu 198
Selecting the Embroidery Hoop
196, 199
Setup-Program 159–170
Sewing Knit Fabrics 53
Sewing Lace 82
Sewing on Elastic Cord 64, 65
Shadow Embroidery 238
Sideways Motion Stitches 89–93
• Combining Manually with
Templates 91
• Connection of Sideways Motion
Stitches with16 Directonal Sewing
92
Index – artista 200
Sewing Sideways Motion Stitches
90
• Sideways Motion Stitches and
Functions 90
• Templates as Sewing Aid 89
Slide-on Table 12
Soft Cover 10, 192
Special (Optional) Accessories 190
Starting to embroider 196, 197
Stitch Counter Function 31, 111,
123, 140
Stitch Plates 17
Stitch Selection 23, 25, 33
Stitch Summary 260–265
Straight Stitch 41, 208
Straight Stitch Plate 17
Stretch Overlock 56, 57
Suitcase System 254
Super Stretch 56
Supplementary Spool Pin 16
•
T
Temporary Altered Stitch Memory
39
Thread 17
Thread Cutter
• Automatic Thread Cutter 28, 205
• On Bobbin Winder 13
• On Head Frame 15
Thread Breakage 246
Threading 14, 193
• Double-and Triple Needle 16
Thread, Needle, Fabric 17, 18
Thread Tension 34
Threading the Triple Needle 16
Turned-edge Appliqués 146, 147
Triple Straight Stitch 48
Trouble Shooting 180, 247
Tutorial 173, 174
U
Underlay Stitches 208
V
Vari-Overlock Seam 55
Visible Hem with Jersey Stitch 58
Visible Hem with Triple Zig-zag
Stitch 51
W
Winding the Bobbin 13
Z
Zig-zag Stitch 50
Zipper 45
Zipper Invisible 46, 47
Zoom (View Motif in Detail) 217
04/01 GB/USA 030 794 71 04
030794.71.04_0401_a200_EN